DENON AVR-3808 User Guide

Download

AV SURROUND RECEIVER

AVR-3808

Owner’s Manual

 GraphicalUserInterface

English

Use this manual in combination with the operating guide displayed on the GUI screen.

GUI Menu Operation (vpage 22, 23) GUI Menu Map (vpage 24) Language (vpage 36) Remote Control Unit Operations (vpage 60)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

We declare under our sole responsibility that this product, to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the following standards: EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN61000-3-2 and EN61000-3-3. Following the provisions of 2006/95/EC and 2004/108/EC Directive.

NOTE ON USE

• Avoid high temperatures. Allow for sufﬁcient heat dispersion when installed in a rack.

• Handle the power cord carefully.

Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.

• Keep the unit free from moisture, water, and dust.

• Unplug the power cord when not using the unit for long periods of time.

* (For apparatuses with ventilation holes)

• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.

• Do not let foreign objects into the unit.

• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in contact with the unit.

• Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way.

CAUTION:

To completely disconnect this product from the mains, disconnect the plug from the wall socket outlet. The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit and must be within easy access by the user.

CAUTION:

• The ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items, such as newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, etc.

• No naked ﬂame sources, such as lighted candles, should be placed on the unit.

• Observe and follow local regulations regarding battery disposal.

• Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing ﬂuids.

• Do not place objects ﬁlled with liquids, such as vases, on the unit.

A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING:

This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. Please dispose of any materials in accordance with the local recycling regulations. When discarding the unit, comply with local rules or regulations. Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with the local regulations concerning batter y disposal. This product and the supplied accessories, excluding the batteries, constitute the applicable product according to the WEEE directive.

Contents

Getting Started Accessories ······················································································2

Cautions on Handling ·····································································3 Cautions on Installation ································································· 3 About the Remote Control Unit ···················································· 3

Inserting the Batteries ····································································3 Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit ································ 3

Part Names and Functions ·····························································4

Front Panel ····················································································· 4 Display ···························································································4 Rear Panel ······················································································5 Remote Control Unit ······································································ 6

Connections Preparations ···················································································· 7

Cables Used for Connections ························································7 Video Conversion Function ·····························································8

Speaker Connections ·····································································9

Speaker Installation ········································································9 Speaker Connections ······························································· 9, 10

Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors ························· 11 Connecting the Monitor ······························································· 12 Connecting the Playback Components ······································ 12

DVD Player ··················································································· 12 Record Player ··············································································· 13 CD Player ····················································································· 13 iPod® ···························································································· 13 TV/CABLE Tuner ··········································································· 14 Satellite Receiver ········································································· 14

Connecting the Recording Components ···································· 15

Digital Video Recorder ·································································· 15 Video Cassette Recorder ····························································· 15 CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck ····································· 16

Connections to Other Devices ····················································· 16

Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector ·············· 16 Video Camera / Game Console ···················································· 17 Component with Multi-channel Output connectors ····················· 17 External Power Ampliﬁer ······························································ 17 USB Port ······················································································ 18 Antenna terminals ······································································· 19 Network Audio ············································································· 20 Multi-Zone ····················································································21 External Controller ·······································································21

Connecting the Power Cord·························································22 Once Connections are Completed ··············································22

GUI Menu Operations Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title····················· 22

Example of Display of Default Values ········································· 22 Examples of GUI Screen Displays ··············································· 23

Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)············································ 23 Example: Menus with Illustrations (Auto Setup) ·························· 23 Cursor Position Display ································································ 23

Operations ·····················································································23 GUI Menu Map ··············································································24

Auto Setup Preparations ·················································································· 25

Auto Setup ····················································································26

a Auto Setup ·············································································· 26 Error Messages ·······································································27 s

Option ····················································································· 27

Parameter Check ·····································································27

Manual Setup Speaker Setup···············································································28

Speaker Conﬁguration ·····························································28

Subwoofer Mode ···································································· 28

Distance ·················································································· 28

Channel Level··········································································29

Crossover Frequency ······························································29

Surround Speaker ···································································29

HDMI Setup ··················································································· 30

i/p Scaler ·················································································30

Resolution ···············································································30

Progressive Mode ··································································· 30

Aspect ····················································································· 30

Color Space ············································································· 30

RGB Range ·············································································30

Auto Lip Sync ·········································································· 30

Audio ······················································································· 30

Audio Setup ··················································································30

EXT. IN Setup ··········································································

2ch Direct/Stereo ····································································

Downmix Option ·····································································

Auto Surround Mode ······························································

Manual EQ ·············································································· 31

Network Setup ··············································································32

Network Setup ········································································ 32

Other ······················································································· 33

Network Information ······························································· 33

Zone Setup ···················································································· 33

ZONE2 ····················································································33

ZONE3 ····················································································33

Option Setup ·················································································34

Amp Assign ·············································································

Volume Control ·······································································

30 31 31 31

34 34

Source Delete ·········································································

GUI ····················································································

Quick Select Name ·································································

Trigger Out 1 ··········································································· 35

Trigger Out 2 ··········································································· 35

Remote ID ···············································································35

2Way Remote ········································································· 35

Dimmer ··················································································· 35

Setup Lock ··············································································36

Maintenance Mode ································································· 36

Firmware Update ···································································· 36

Language ······················································································· 36

Source Select Input Source Selection ·································································37

Settings Related to Playing Input Sources ·································37

Play ·························································································

Auto Preset ·············································································

Preset Skip ··············································································

Preset Name ···········································································

Input Mode ·············································································38

Rename ···················································································38

Other ······················································································· 38

Playback Mode (iPod) ······························································39

Assign ····················································································· 39

Playback Mode ········································································40

Surround Modes Standard Playback ········································································40

Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources ·····································40 Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) ·············40

DSP Simulation Playback·····························································41 Stereo Playback ············································································41 Direct Playback ·············································································41

Playback in the PURE DIRECT Mode ··········································· 41

Parameter Audio······························································································42

Surround Parameters ························································ 42, 43

Tone ························································································43

Room EQ ················································································44

RESTORER ··············································································44

Night Mode ············································································· 44

Audio Delay ············································································· 44

Picture Adjust ················································································ 45

Contrast ··················································································45

Brightness ··············································································· 45

Chroma Level ·········································································· 45

Hue ·························································································45

34, 35

37 37 37 38



e r y

Getting Started

Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Information Status ····························································································45

a s

Audio Input Signal ········································································45 HDMI Information ········································································· 46

a s

Auto Surround ·············································································· Quick Select ·················································································· Preset Station ···············································································

Playback Preparations ·················································································· 47

Turning the Power On ··································································47 Operations During Playback ·························································47

Playing Video and Audio Equipment ···········································47

Basic Operation ············································································ 47

Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts ·················································48

Basic Operation ············································································ 48 Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory) ································· 48 Listening to Preset Stations ·························································49 RDS (Radio Data System) ····························································49 RDS Search ··················································································49 PTY Search ··················································································· 50 TP Search ·····················································································50 RT (Radio Text) ·············································································· 51

iPod® Playback ············································································· 51

Basic Operation ············································································ 51 Listening to Music ·······································································52 Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod ································· 52

Playing Network Audio or USB Memory Devices ······················ 53

Basic Operation ············································································ 54 Listening to Internet Radio ····················································· 54, 55 Presetting Internet Radio Stations ··············································· 55 Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites ·················· 55 Playing Files Stored on a Computer ·············································55 Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices ···························· 56 Operating the AVR-3808 Using a Browser (Web control) ············57

MAIN ZONE ············································································ 45 ZONE2/3 ·················································································45

Signal Information ··································································· 46 Monitor ···················································································46

46 46 46

Convenient Functions ··································································59

Channel Level ···············································································59 Fader Function ·············································································59 Quick Select Function ··································································59 Personal Memory Plus Function ·················································· 59 Last Function Memory ·································································59 Backup Memory ··········································································· 59 Resetting the Microprocessor ······················································59

Remote Control Unit Operations Main Remote Control Unit···························································60

Operating DENON Audio Components ········································ 60 Presetting ····················································································· 60 Operating Preset Components ············································60 ~ 62 Setting the Remote ID ································································· 63 Learning Function ·········································································63 System Call Function ····································································64 Punch Through Function ······························································· 64 Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit ·······································65 Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness ············································65 Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit ····································· 65

Sub Remote Control Unit Operations ··································66, 67

Switching Zones ···········································································68 Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK mode) ·······················································68 Setting the Remote ID ································································· 68 Resetting the Settings ·································································· 68

Amp Assign / Multi-Zone Connections and Operations Multi-Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function ·········69 ~ 71

Multi-Zone Settings and Operations with Zone Pre-out Output ···71 Multi-Zone Operations ································································· 72

Turning the Power On and Off······················································72 Selecting the Input Source ··························································· 72 Adjusting the Volume ··································································· 72 Turning off the Sound Temporarily ················································ 72

Other Information ································································73 ~ 82

Getting Started

Thank you for purchasing this DENON product. To ensure proper operation, please read these owner’s manual carefully before using the product. After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.

Accessories

Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.

q Owner’s manual ...................................................................... 1

w Service station list ...................................................................1

e Power cord (Cord length: Approx. 1.5 m) ................................. 1

r Main remote control (RC-1068) ............................................... 1

t LR6/AA batteries (for RC-1068) ................................................ 2

y Sub remote control (RC-1070) ................................................. 1

u R03/AAA batteries (for RC-1070) .............................................2

i FM indoor antenna ..................................................................1

o AM loop antenna ..................................................................... 1

Q0 Setup microphone (Cord length: Approx. 7.6 m) ...................... 1

Other Operations and Functions Other Operations ·········································································· 57

Playing Super Audio CD ······························································· 57 Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode) ····················· 58



Troubleshooting ···································································83 ~ 85

Speciﬁcations ··············································································· 86

List of preset codes ··········································· End of this manual

Cautions on Handling

• Before turning the power switch on

Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are

no problems with the connection cables.

•

Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is set to the standby mode. When traveling or leaving home for long periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

• About condensation

If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of

the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate properly.

If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power

turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature before using the unit.

• Cautions on using mobile phones

Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If so, move

the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.

• Moving the unit

Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power

outlet.

Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units before

moving the unit.

•

Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the actual unit for explanation purposes.

About the Remote Control Unit

In addition to the AVR-3808, the included main remote control unit (RC-1068) can also be used to operate the equipment listed below.

q DENON system components w Non-DENON system components

• By setting the preset memory (vpage 60 ~ 62)

• By using the learn function (vpage 63)

Inserting the Batteries

q Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid.

(RC-1068) (RC-1070)

w Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the

battery compartment.

(RC-1068) (RC-1070)

R03/AAA

LR6/AA

NOTE

• Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit.

• The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.

• When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction, following the “q” and “w” marks in the battery compartment.

• To prevent damage or leakage of battery ﬂuid:

• Do not use a new battery together with an old one.

• Do not use two different types of batteries.

• Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.

• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in

ﬂames.

• If the battery ﬂuid should leak, carefully wipe the ﬂuid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.

• Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods.

• When replacing the batteries, have the new batteries ready and insert them as quickly as possible.

Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit

Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

Getting Started

Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Cautions on Installation

Note: For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a conﬁned space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.

b Note

Wall

e Put the rear cover back on.

(RC-1070)

30°

Approx. 7 m

(RC-1068)

NOTE

The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight, strong artiﬁcial light from an inverter type ﬂuorescent lamp or infrared light.



w e

to i u y

q r

Q3Q2Q1Q0

yQ6Q7 uo

iQ4 Q0

Q1Q2Q3Q5

wq e r

W3W4W5W7W8W9E0E1E2E3 W6

Q4 Q5 Q6 Q8 W1W0Q7 W2Q9

Getting Started

Part Names and Functions

For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).

Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Front Panel

E0 DIRECT/STEREO button·····························(41) E1 PURE DIRECT button ·································· (41)

Display

E2 DSP SIMULATION button ·························· (41) E3 STANDARD button ·····································(40)

GWith the door openH

q Power operation button

(ON/STANDBY) ··········································· (47)

w Power indicator ··········································· (47) e Power switch (hON jOFF) ····················· (47) r QUICK SELECT buttons / indicators ········· (59) t MASTER VOLUME control knob ················ (47) y Master volume indicator u Display i Remote control sensor ································· (3) o SOURCE SELECT knob······························· (37) Q0 SOURCE button ·········································· (37)

Q1 TUNING PRESET button ···························· (49) Q2 ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT button ··········(58, 72) Q3 VIDEO SELECT button ·······························(38) Q4 Headphones jack (PHONES) ······················ (47) Q5 ZONE2 ON/OFF button ······························ (72) Q6 ZONE3 ON/OFF button ······························ (72) Q7 INPUT MODE button ·································· (38) Q8 MENU button ·············································· (23) Q9 Cursor buttons (uio p) ·························· (23) W0 CH SEL / ENTER button ······················· (23, 59) W1 RETURN button ·········································· (23) W2 V.AUX INPUT connectors ··························· (17) W3 SETUP MIC jack ·········································· (25) W4 ROOM EQ button ········································ (44) W5 DIMMER button ·········································· (35) W6 USB port ······················································ (18) W7 STATUS button ···········································(45) W8 AUDIO DELAY button ································· (44) W9 RESTORER button ······································ (44)

q Input signal indicators w Input signal channel indicators

These light when digital signals are input.

e Information display

The input source name, surround mode, setting

values and other information are displayed here.

r Output signal channel indicators t Surround speaker indicators

These light according to the settings of the

surround A and B speakers.

y Master volume indicator u AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT indicator

This lights when the room equalizer is selected.

i Recording output source indicator

This lights when the REC OUT mode is

selected.

o NIGHT indicator

This lights when the night mode is selected.

Q0 Multi-zone indicators

These light when the power for the respective

zone is turned on.

Q1 RESTORER indicator

This lights when the RESTORER mode is

selected.

Q2 AL24 indicator

This lights when AL24 Processing Plus is

activated (vpage 75).

Q3 D.LINK indicator

This lights when playing using DENON LINK

connections.

Q4 Input mode indicators Q5 HDMI indicator

This lights when playing using HDMI

connections.

Q6 Decoder indicators

These light when the respective decoders are

operating.

Q7 Tuner reception mode indicators

These light according to the reception conditions

when the input source is set to “TUNER”.

• AUTO

This lights when in the auto tuning mode.

• RDS

This lights when receiving RDS broadcasts.

• STEREO

In the FM mode, this lights when receiving analog stereo broadcasts.

• TUNED

This lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in.



Q6 Q7 Q7Q8 Q6 Q9

Q1Q2 Q0

oQ3Q4

q w e iu

Q6 Q7 Q7Q8 Q6 Q9

Rear Panel

Getting Started

Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

q RS-232C connector ····································· (21) w REMOTE CONTROL jacks···························(21) e TRIGGER OUT jacks ···································(21) r FM/AM antenna terminals

(TUNER ANTENNA) ···································· (19)

t DOCK CONTROL jack ································· (13) y Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS) ·················· (9) u AC OUTLET ·················································(22)

i AC inlet (AC IN) ··········································· (22) o Digital audio connectors

(OPTICAL / COAXIAL) ·························· (12, 14)

Q0 ETHERNET connector ································· (20) Q1 USB port ······················································ (18) Q2 DENON LINK connector ····························· (16) Q3 COMPONENT VIDEO connectors ·············· (12) Q4 HDMI connectors ·········································(11)

Q5 VIDEO / S-VIDEO connectors ···················· (12) Q6 Analog audio connectors (AUDIO) ············ (12) Q7 PRE OUT connectors ····························· (17, 21) Q8 EXT. IN connectors ····································· (17) Q9 SIGNAL GND terminal ······························· (13)



t y u

Q6 Q7

t y

Getting Started

n Main remote control unit (RC-1068) n Sub remote control unit (RC-1070)

Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Remote Control Unit

t System buttons ···································· (61, 62) y Audio delay button (A. DL) ························(44) u Tuner system buttons ································ (48) i Input mode button (INPUT) ······················· (38) o MENU button ·············································· (23) Q0 Cursor buttons (uio p) ························· (23) Q1 Parameter / Search button

(PARA / SRCH) ······································ (42, 49)

Q2 HOME button ·············································· (60) Q3 Channel buttons (CH) ································· (48) Q4 Input source select / Number buttons ···(37, 48) Q5 Remote control signal transmitter ·············· (3) Q6 Device select indicators (DEV1 / DEV2) ···(60) Q7 ZONE3 select indicators (Z3) ····················· (72) Q8 RESTORER button (RSTR) ·························· (44) Q9 Night button (NGT) ···································· (44) W0 Test tone button (TEST) ····························· (29) W1 Surround speaker select button (SPKR) ··· (29) W2 POWER buttons ·········································· (47) W3 Channel select (CH SEL) /

ENTER button ······································· (23, 59)

W4 Return button (RTN) ··································· (23) W5 Master volume control buttons (VOL) ······ (47) W6 Muting button (MUTE) ··························(47, 72) W7 Main remote control unit setup button

(RC SETUP) ················································· (60)

q ZONE indicators·········································· (68) w Advanced setup button ······························ (68) e Input source select buttons ······················· (37) r CHANNEL buttons ······································ (48) t SHIFT button ··············································· (48) y MENU button ·············································· (23) u Cursor buttons (uio p) ························· (23) i SEARCH button ··········································(49) o REPEAT button ············································ (52) Q0 RANDOM button ········································(52) Q1 Remote control signal transmitter ·············· (3) Q2 ZONE SELECT button ································· (68) Q3 Zone power on/off buttons

(ZONE ON / ZONE OFF) ····························· (72)

Q4 Master volume control buttons

(VOLUME) ············································(66, 67)

Q5 Muting button (MUTE) ··························(47, 72) Q6 ENTER button ············································· (23) Q7 RETURN button ·········································· (23) Q8 System buttons ······························ (48, 66, 67) Q9 ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES

(DIRECT PLAY) button ······························· (66)

W0 USB (DIRECT PLAY) button························(66)

NOTE

The AUX-1, AUX-2, AUX-3, SAT TU, DTU, DVR-2 and OPTION buttons cannot be used.

q Signal transmission indicator ···················(60) w Mode select buttons ··································(60) e Quick select / System call buttons ·····(59, 64) r Surround mode buttons ······················ (40, 41)



The time for which the backlight stays on can be changed (vpage 65 “Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit”).

NOTE

• The M. SEL, SAT TU, DTU buttons cannot be

used.

• The ZONE2 mode QUICK SELECT (1 ~ 3), A.DL,

RSTR, NGT, INPUT, SPKR, TEST and surround

mode buttons cannot be used.

• The ZONE4 mode cannot be used.

Preparations

Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Connections

Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are described in these operating instructions. Please select the types of connections suited for the equipment you are connecting. With some types of connections, certain settings must be made on the AVR-3808. For details, refer to the instructions for the respective connection items below.

NOTE

• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right).

• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in humming or noise.

Cables Used for Connections

Select the cables according to the equipment being connected.

Audio cables Video cables

Coaxial digital connections

(Orange)

Coaxial digital (75 Ω/ohms pin-plug) cable

Optical digital connections

Optical cable

Analog connections (stereo)

(White)

(Red)

Stereo pin-plug cable

Analog connections (monaural, for subwoofer)

(Black)

Pin-plug cable

DENON LINK connections

DENON LINK cable

Component video connections

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

S-Video connections

Video connections

(Yellow)

Component video cable

S-Video cable

75 Ω/ohms pin-plug video cable

Audio and video cables

HDMI connections

19-pin HDMI cable

Connections

(Y)

(PB/CB)

(PR/CR)

Speaker connections

Audio signal: Video signal:

Output

Input

Speaker cables

Network connections

Ethernet cable

Signal direction

Input

Output

Input

Output



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Video Conversion Function

• This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVR-3808 into the format used to output the video signals from the AVR-3808 to a monitor.

• The AVR-3808’s video input/output circuitry is compatible with the following four types of video signals:

Connections

Digital video signals: HDMI Analog video signals: Component video, S-Video and Video

GFlow of video signals inside the AVR-3808H

Main zone

High picture

quality playback

HDMI connector

• When not using this function, connect a monitor output with the same type of connector as the video input connector.

• The resolution of the HDMI input-compatible monitor connected to the AVR-3808 can be checked at GUI menu “Information” – “HDMI Information” – “Monitor” (vpage 46).

NOTE

• HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.

• 1080p component input video signals cannot be output to anything other than component video connectors.

• 480p/576p, 1080i and 720p component video input signals cannot be converted into S-Video or Video format.

• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate.

ZONE2

High picture

quality playback

Component video

connectors

S-Video connector

Video connector

Video inputs Video outputs

: When 480i/576i signals are input in the main zone

GFlow of video signals for ZONE2H

S-Video connector

Video connector Video connector

Video inputs Video outputs

Component video

connectors

S-Video connector

Video connector

Monitor

ZONE2

monitor



Speaker Connections

w q

w q w q w q w q w q w q

w q

(R)

(L) (R) (L) (R)

(L)

(L) (R)

Speaker Installation

The illustration below shows a basic example of installation of the ampliﬁer combined with 8 speakers and a monitor.

Subwoofer Center speaker

Surround back speakers

Front speakers

Place the front speakers to the sides of the monitor or screen and as ﬂush with the screen surface as possible.

The table below shows a typical speaker conﬁguration for the AVR-3808.

7.1-channels

(Surround A+B)

7.1-channels

6.1-channels

5.1-channels

3.1-channels

2.1-channels 2-channels

FRONT

CENTER

L R L R L R L R

S S S S S S S S S

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

SURROUND ASURROUND BSURROUND

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

Surround speakers

BACK

only

– – – – – – – – – – –

S S

SUBWOOFER

–

S S

Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Speaker Connections

Example: 7.1-channels (Surround A+B)

Front speakers Center speaker Subwoofer

Connections

Subwoofer with built-in ampliﬁer

b L : Left R : Right

S S S

When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).

Surround speakers

Surround Back

speakers



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Connecting the Speaker Cables

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and – (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to the AVR-3808, and be sure to interconnect the channels and polarities correctly.

Connections

Peel off about 10 mm of sheathing from

the tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it.

Turn the speaker terminal

counterclockwise to loosen it.

Insert the speaker cable’s core wire to

the hilt into the speaker terminal.

Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to

tighten it.

NOTE

• Use speakers with an impedance of 6 to 16 Ω/ohms. When using surround A and B speakers simultaneously, use speakers with an impedance of 8 to 16 Ω/ohms.

• Connect the speaker cables in such a way that they do not stick out of the speaker terminals. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and – sides touch each other (v “Protection circuit”).

• Never touch the speaker terminals while the power supply is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock.

Protection circuit

If speakers with an impedance lower than speciﬁed (for example 4 Ω/ohms speakers) are used for an extended period of time with the volume turned up high, the temperature may rise, activating the protection circuit. When the protection circuit is activated, the speaker output is shut off and the power indicator ﬂashes red. If this happens, unplug the power cord, then check the speaker cable and input cable connections. If the set is extremely hot, wait for it to cool off and improve ventilation around it. Once this is done, plug the power cord back in and turn the set’s power back on. If the protection circuit is activated again even though there are no problems in the ventilation around the set nor in the connections, the set may be damaged. Turn the power off, then contact a DENON service center.

0

065

)%.*

Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors

With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.

MonitorDVD player

b The AVR-3808 is equipped for HDMI version 1.3a. This

version is compatible with other versions, allowing connection to all components equipped with an HDMI connector.

b The AVR-3808 is compatible with 30- and 36-bit Deep

Color.

Compatible

audio format

2-channel linear PCM

Multi-channel linear PCM

Details

2ch 32-192 kHz 16/20/24 bits

8ch 32-192 kHz 16/20/24 bits

Dolby Digital, DTS Bitstream DVD-Video

2/5.1ch

DSD

2.8224 MHz 1 bit

Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,

Bitstream

DTS-HD

In order to play the digital video and audio signals of a DVDVideo or DVD-Audio disc using HDMI/DVI connections, both the connected DVD player and monitor must be equipped for a copyright protection system called “HDCP” (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection). HDCP is a copy protection technology consisting of data encoding and mutual identiﬁcation of the devices. The AVR-3808 is HDCP-compatible. For details on the DVD player or monitor you are using, refer to its operating instructions.

Discs

(examples)

CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

DVD-Audio

SACD

HD DVD, Blu-ray Disc

NOTE

• Use a CPPM-compatible DVD player to play DVD-Audio discs that are copyright-protected by CPPM.

• The AVR-3808 cannot be controlled from another device via the HDMI cable.

• The audio signals output from the HDMI connector (sampling frequency, bit rate, etc.) may be restricted by the connected device.

• Video signals are not output properly when using devices that are not HDCP-compatible.

• Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case, switch the DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.

• If the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” setting (vpage 30) is set to “Amp”, the sound may be interrupted when the monitor’s power is turned off.

• Use a cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a certiﬁed HDMI product) for connection to the HDMI connector. Normal playback may not be possible when using a cable other than one on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a non-HDMI-certiﬁed product).

• If the monitor or DVD player does not support deep color, deep color signal transfer is not possible.

• If the monitor or DVD player does not support xvYCC, xvYCC signal transfer is not possible.

• If the monitor does not support “Auto Lipsync Correction” function, this function will not work.

• When the AVR-3808 and DVD player are connected using an HDMI cable, also connect the AVR-3808 and monitor using an HDMI cable.

• If the connected monitor or DVD player only has a DVI-D connector, use an HDMI/DVI converter cable. When using a DVI cable, no audio signals are transmitted.

• Use a Deep Color compatible cable for connection to Deep Color compatible devices.

When connecting with an HDMI/DVI converter cable (adapter)

• HDMI video signals are theoretically compatible with the DVI format. When connecting to a monitor, etc., equipped with a DVI-D connector, connection is possible using an

HDMI/DVI converter cable, but depending on the combination of components in some cases the video signals will not be output.

• When connecting using an HDMI/DVI converter adapter, the video signals may not be output properly due to poor connections with the connected cable, etc.

Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Connections

• By default, the HDMI audio signals are output from the speakers connected to the AVR-3808.

• To output the sound from the TV, make the settings at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup”

– “Audio” – “TV” (vpage 30).



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

47*%&0

7*%&0

$0.10/&/57*%&0

: 1# 13

7*%&0

)%.*

*/ */

47*%&0

065

"6%*07*%&0

$0.10/&/57*%&0

: 1# 13

7*%&0

065 065

"6%*0

$0"9*"-

065

065065

)%.*

Connecting the Monitor

• Connect the cables to be used (vpage 8 “Video Conversion Function”).

• With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.

• To output the audio signals to the monitor with HDMI connections, set GUI menu “Manual Setup”

Connections

– “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” to “TV” (vpage 30).

Monitor

Connecting the Playback Components

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.

DVD Player

• Connect the cables to be used.

• With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.

DVD player

NOTE

• The component video connectors may be indicated differently on your monitor. For details, see the monitor’s operating instructions.

• The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals.

Video-converted HDMI signals are not included in the audio signals. To play the sound by monitor, make

analog or digital audio output connections to monitor’s audio input connectors.



• Connect an HDP (High-Deﬁnition Player) in the same way.

• When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source

Select” – “DVD” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 39).

Record Player

(/%

"6%*0

065

"6%*0

$0"9*"-

065

"4%3

CD Player

iPod

Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Turntable (MM cartridge)

Connect the cables to be used.

CD player

Use a DENON Control Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately) to connect the iPod to the AVR-3808. For instructions on the Control Dock for iPod settings, refer to the Control Dock for iPod’s operating instructions.

Example :

iPod

Connections

• When connecting a record player with an MC cartridge, use a commercially available MC head ampliﬁer or a step-up transformer.

• Induction humming (a booming sound) may be produced from the

• With some record players, noise may be generated when the ground

speakers if the volume is raised with no record player connected.

wire is connected. If so, disconnect the ground wire.

NOTE

The AVR-3808’s SIGNAL GND terminal is meant to reduce noise when a record player is connected. This is not a safety ground terminal.

When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “CD” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 39).

• With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.

• To assign the iPod to a connector other than VCR (iPod), make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source to which iPod dock assigned)” – “Assign” – “iPod dock” (vpage 39).



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

47*%&0

065

"6%*07*%&0

$0.10/&/57*%&0

: 1# 13

7*%&0

065 065

"6%*0

065

$0"9*"-

065

47*%&0

065

"6%*07*%&0

7*%&0

065 065

015*$"-"6%*0

065

TV/CABLE Tuner

Satellite Receiver

Connect the cables to be used.

Connections

TV tuner

Connect the cables to be used.

DBS / BS tuner

When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “TV/CBL” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 39).



• When using a coaxial digital cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source

Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 39).

• When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source

Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 39).

Connecting the Recording Components

47*%&0

3- 3-

*/*/065

"6%*07*%&0

*/065

015*$"-

065

"6%*07*%&0

065

47*%&0

3- 3-

*/*/065

"6%*07*%&0

065

"6%*07*%&0

065 */065

015*$"-

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.

Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Video Cassette Recorder

Connect the cables to be used.

Video cassette recorder

Digital Video Recorder

Connect the cables to be used.

Digital video recorder

or or

• Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals.

• When recording via the AVR-3808, the playback device’s cable must be of the same type as the cable used to connect the AVR-3808’s DVR OUT connector. Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : DVR OUT → S-Video cable TV IN → Video cable : DVR OUT → Video cable

• When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “DVR” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 39).

NOTE

Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-3808’s OPTICAL2 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL2.

• When recording via the AVR-3808, the playback device’s cable must be of the same type as the cable used to connect the AVR-3808’s VCR OUT connector. Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : VCR OUT → S-Video cable TV IN → Video cable : VCR OUT → Video cable

• When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “VCR” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 39).

NOTE

Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-3808’s OPTICAL3 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL3.

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

3- 3-

065 */065

015*$"-

"6%*0

%&/0/-*/,

7*%&0

CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck

Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals, or digital connections if you wish to record digital audio signals, depending on the types of connectors on the components being used.

Connections

CD recorder / MD recorder / Tape deck

Connections to Other Devices

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.

Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector

Multi-channel playback is possible with DVD-Audio discs, Super Audio CD, etc.

DVD player

NOTE

Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-3808’s OPTICAL3 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL3.



To use with DENON LINK connections, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “Assign” – “Digital” – “DENON LINK” (vpage 39).

47*%&0

065

"6%*07*%&0

7*%&0

065 065

015*$"-"6%*0

065

46#

800'&3

$&/5&3 463306/%

#"$,

463306/%

'30/5

"6%*0

Video Camera / Game Console

46#

800'&3

$&/5&3 463306/%

#"$,

463306/%

'30/5

"6%*0

Video camera / Game console

Component with Multi-channel Output connectors

DVD player / Super Audio CD player / External decoder

Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

External Power Ampliﬁer

Power ampliﬁer

Connections

When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left

• To play the analog input signals input to the EXT. IN connectors,

press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or INPUT button

channel (SBL).

on the main remote control unit and select “EXT. IN” or make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Input Mode” – “Input Mode” – “EXT. IN” (vpage 38).

• The video signal can be connected in the same way as a DVD player

(vpage 12).

• To play copyright-protected discs, connect the AVR-3808’s EXT. IN connector with the DVD player’s analog multi-channel output connector.



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

USB Port

n Front panel n Rear panel

USB memory device USB memory device

Connections

• In the initial status, USB memory devices can be used by connecting them to the USB port on the front panel.

• To change the port to be used, see “USB Select” on page 40.

• For instructions on playing the ﬁles on a USB memory device, see page 56.

NOTE

• Set to the USB port you want to use.

• The AVR-3808 is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time. Select the USB port you want to use at the GUI menu “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” – “USB Select”.

• Do not use the extension cable for connecting the USB memory deveice to the AVR-3808’s USB port.

Use of the extension cable may cause harmful interference.



Antenna terminals

An FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly.

Direction of broadcasting station

FM antenna

75 Ω/ohms Coaxial cable

FM indoor antenna

(supplied)

AM loop antenna (supplied)

Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Connections

AM loop antenna assembly

Remove the vinyl tie and take out the connection line.

a. With the antenna on top of

any stable surface.

Mount

Ground

Connect to the AM antenna terminals.

Bend in the reverse direction.

b. With the antenna attached

to a wall.

Installation hole Mount on wall, etc.

AM outdoor antenna

Connection of AM antennas

1. Push the lever.

2. Insert the conductor.

NOTE

• Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.

• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM loop antenna.

• Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel.

3. Return the lever.



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Network Audio

Connections

Router

Internet

Modem

To WAN side

To LAN port

Computer

LAN port/

Ethernet

connector

Required system n Broadband Internet connection

A broadband line connection to the Internet is required in order to use the AVR-3808’s Internet radio function and ﬁrmware update.

n Modem

This is a device that is connected to the broadband line to communicate with the Internet. Some are integrated with the router.

n Router

When using the AVR-3808, we recommend you use a router

equipped with the following functions:

• Built-in DHCP (Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol) server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.

• Built-in 100BASE-TX switch When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching

hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.

n Ethernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)

• The AVR-3808 does not come with an Ethernet cable.

• Some ﬂat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise. We recommend using a normal type cable.

• For the Ethernet cable, used a shielded twisted pair (STP) cable. Do not use an unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable, as it may exceed

noise standard limits.

n Computer

A computer with the following speciﬁcations is required to use a music server:

• OS Windows® XP Service Pack2, Windows Vista

• Software (Prepare one of the following.)

· .NET Framework 1.1 and Windows Media Connect (Windows XP)

· Windows Media Player ver.11

· DLNA-compatible server software

• Internet browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later

• LAN port

• 300 MB or more free disk space b Free disk space is required to store music ﬁles. The following

sizes are approximate.

For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop.

NOTE

• A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet. No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband

connection to the Internet.

• The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an ISP or a computer shop for details.

• Depending on the server, video ﬁles may be displayed, but they cannot be played on the AVR-3808.

n Others

• If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network

settings are made manually, make the settings at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 32, 33).

• With the AVR-3808, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP

functions to make the network settings automatically.

• When using a broadband router (DHCP function), the AVR-3808

sets the IP address, etc., automatically.

When using the AVR-3808 connected to a network with no DHCP

function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 32, 33).

• The AVR-3808 is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible

router is required if you have a contract for a line of the type with which the PPPoE is set.

• Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract, it may

be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet radio function. If you made proxy server settings on the computer to connect to the Internet, make the proxy server settings on the AVR-3808 in the same way.

0

Format Bit rate Per minute Per hour

MP3 / WMA

MPEG-4 AAC

WAV (LPCM)

FLAC

128 kbps Approx. 1 MB Approx. 60 MB 192 kbps Approx. 1.5 MB Approx. 90 MB 256 kbps Approx. 2 MB Approx. 120 MB

392 kbps Approx. 3 MB Approx. 180 MB 1400 kbps Approx. 10 MB Approx. 600 MB 1080 kbps Approx. 7.7 MB Approx. 464 MB

Multi-Zone

"69 065

"6%*0

*/*/

7*%&0

"6%*07*%&0

ZONE2 or ZONE3 Pre-out Connections

• If another power ampliﬁer or pre-main (integrated) ampliﬁer is connected, the ZONE2 or ZONE3 pre-out (variable or ﬁxed level) connectors can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 or ZONE3 the same time (vpage 69 ~ 72).

• When using an S-Video cable or a video cable for connection between the AVR-3808 and an input device, connect to the video connectors.

• The ZONE2 video out is only for ZONE2.

Monitor (ZONE2)

Power amplier (ZONE2 or ZONE3)

Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

External Controller

Connections

RS-232C connector

This connector is used for an external controller.

b If you wish to control the AVR-3808 from an

external controller using the RS-232C connector, perform the operation below beforehand.

q Turn the AVR-3808’s power. w Turn off the AVR-3808’s power from the external

controller.

e Check that the AVR-3808 is in the standby mode.

• When using in combination with an RF Remote Controller (RC-7000CI, sold separately) or RF Remote Receiver (RC-7001RCI, sold separately) two-way communication with an RF Remote Controller is possible.

The AVR-3808’s status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music ﬁles can be browsed watching

the RF Remote Controller’s display. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices.

• When used in combination with an RF Remote Controller or RF Remote Receiver, make the settings at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “2Way Remote” – “Used” (vpage 35).

Input

Infrared retransmitter

Output

Infrared sensor

Extension jack for future use.

NOTE

• For the audio output, use high quality pin-plug cords so that no induction humming or noise is produced.

• For instructions on installing and operating separately sold devices, refer to the respective devices’ operating instructions.

• To conduct multi-zone playback, see “Amp Assign / Multi-Zone Connections and Operations” (vpage 69 ~ 72).

Trigger output jacks

The power of an external device equipped with a trigger input jack can be turned on and off in association with operations on the AVR-3808. For details, see GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Trigger Out 1” or “Trigger Out 2” (vpage

35).

• Output level: 150 mA/12 V Check the trigger input conditions of the connected device.

• If the trigger input level of the connected device is higher than 150 mA/12 V and depending on the short-circuiting conditions, the AVR-3808’s protection circuit may be activated, in which case “TRIGGER PROTECT” appears on the display. If this happens, turn off the AVR-3808’s power and disconnect the connected device.





Getting Started Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

NOTE

• Insert the AC plugs securely. Incomplete connections could cause noise.

• Only use the AC outlet to plug in audio devices. Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or anything other than audio equipment.

Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord.

To household

power outlet

(AC 230 V, 50 Hz)

Power cord

(included)

Connection to the AC outlet

• This outlet supply power to external audio devices.

• The power supplied from these outlets turns on and off together with the set’s power switch.

• Audio equipment with a total power consumption of 100 W (0.43 A) can be connected.

Connecting the Power Cord

Turning the Power On (vpage 47)

Once Connections are Completed

Auto Setup

Optimize settings for speakers in use. The appropriate settings for the speakers you are using will be performed automatically. Operate as instructed on the GUI.

Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title

GUI Menu Operations

With the AVR-3808, settings and operations for most functions can be performed by operating while looking at the GUI menus displayed on the monitor screen.

Example of Display of Default Values

[Selectable items] 7.1 (B) 7.1 5.1

In lists of selectable items or adjustable ranges, the item surrounded by a border is the default value.

Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be operated from the GUI. We recommend performing such operations from the GUI.

This is the GUI icon for this setting item or for the menu series to which this item belongs.

The GUI cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.

Connections Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Some typical examples are described below.

SOURCE SELECT

TUNER PHONO

HDP

DVD

TV/CBL

Select input source and make playback settings

AUTO S ETUP

1 2 3 4 5

Start

RETURN

Amp As sign

Config . 7.1(B )

STEP1 Speaker Det ection Please place the microphone at ear height at main li stening position.

Start Auto Setup

Enter Cancel

Selected item

name

List of subsequent items

Guidance text for item at

cursor position

Operation step indicators

Illustration

Operation

button guidance

Guidance text for item at cursor

position

Operation guidance text

n Icon

n List

Assign

Input Mode Rename Other

Switch the selected item

Selected item

Switch the selected item

Switch to the next item

Selected item

Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)

Examples of GUI Screen Displays

Example: Menus with Illustrations

(Auto Setup)

Cursor Position Display

Operations

The same operation is possible on the main unit or remote control unit.

b Switch the selected item using

ui.

Press the MENU button.

The GUI menu is displayed.

b To operate from the main remote control unit, be sure to set the

remote control unit to the AMP mode.

Press the u i p button to select the menu to be set

or operated.

b To return to the previous item, press the o or RETURN button.

Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.

Press the MENU button to  nish.

Switch to the next item

Setup

When “Screensaver” is set to “ON”, the screensaver is activated if no operation is performed for about 3 minutes.



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

GUI Menu Map

Parameter

(vpage 42 ~ 45)

Information

(vpage 45, 46)

n Status

• MAIN ZONE

• ZONE2/3

n Audio Input Signal n HDMI Information n Auto Surround Mode n Quick Select n Preset Station

n Audio

• Surround Parameters

· Mode

· Cinema EQ

· DRC

· D.COMP

· LFE

· Center Image

· Panorama

· Dimension

· Center Width

· Delay Time

· Effect

· Effect Level

· Room Size

· AFDM

· SB CH Out

· Subwoofer Att.

· Subwoofer

· Default

• Tone

· Tone Defeat

· Bass

· Treble

• Room EQ

• RESTORER

• Night Mode

• Audio Delay

n Picture Adjust

• Contrast

• Brightness

• Chroma Level

• Hue

Manual Setup

(vpage 28 ~ 36)

n Speaker Setup (vpage 28, 29)

• Speaker Conﬁ guration

• Subwoofer Mode

• Distance

• Channel Level

• Crossover Frequency

• Surround Speaker

n HDMI Setup (vpage 30)

• i/p Scaler

• Resolution

• Progressive Mode

• Aspect

• Color Space

• RGB Range

• Auto Lip Sync

• Audio

n Audio Setup (vpage 30, 31)

• EXT. IN Setup

· Surround Speaker

· Subwoofer Level

• 2ch Direct/Stereo

• Downmix Option

• Auto Surround

• Manual EQ

Auto Setup

(vpage 25 ~ 27)

n Auto Setup

• STEP1: Speaker Detect

• STEP2: Measurements

• STEP3: Calculation

• STEP4: Check

• STEP5: Store

n Option

• Room EQ

• Direct Mode

• Mic Select

n Parameter

• Speaker Conﬁ guration Check

• Distance Check

• Channel Level Check

• Crossover Check

• EQ Check

• Restore

n Network Setup (vpage 32, 33)

• Network Setup

• Other

· Power Saving

· Character

· PC Language

• Network Information

n Zone Setup (vpage 33)

• ZONE2

· Bass

· Treble

· HPF

· Lch Level

· Rch Level

· Channel

· Volume Level

· Volume Limit

· Power On Level

· Mute Level

• ZONE3

· Bass

· Treble

· HPF

· Lch Level

· Rch Level

· Channel

· Volume Level

· Volume Limit

· Power On Level

· Mute Level

Option Setup (vpage 34 ~ 36)

• Amp Assign

• Volume Control

· Volume Limit

· Power On Level

· Mute Level

• Source Delete

• GUI

· Screensaver

· Wall Paper

· Format

· Text

· Master Volume

· NET/USB

· iPod

· Tuner

• Quick Select Name

• Trigger Out 1

• Trigger Out 2

• Remote ID

• 2Way Remote

• Dimmer

• Setup Lock

• Maintenance Mode

• Firmware Update

n Language (vpage 36)

Source Select

(vpage 37 ~ 40)

n TUNER (FM/AM)

• Play

• Auto Preset

• Preset Skip

• Preset Name

• Input Mode

• Rename

• Other

· Video Select

· Source Level

n PHONO

• Input Mode

• Rename

• Other

· Video Select

· Source Level

n CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR, V.AUX

• Play (iPod)

• Playback Mode (iPod)

• Assign

• Input Mode

• Rename

• Other

· Video Select

Video Convert (Excluding CDs)

· Source Level

n NET/USB

• Play

• Playback Mode

• Input Mode

• Rename

• Other

· Video Select

· Source Level

Surround Mode

(vpage 40, 41)

n STEREO n DIRECT n STANDARD n DOLBY PLIIx, DOLBY PLII or

DOLBY PL

n DTS NEO:6 n 7CH STEREO n WIDE SCREEN n SUPER STADIUM n ROCK ARENA n JAZZ CLUB n CLASSIC CONCERT n MONO MOVIE n VIDEO GAME n MATRIX n VIRTUAL

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

• Audyssey MultEQ® XT automatically measures the acoustical problems in the listening environment to create the best audio experience for your home theater.

• It optimizes a large listening area where one or more listeners are seated.

Measurements are performed by placing the calibrated microphone

(DM-A405) successively at multiple positions throughout the listening area as shown in Example q. For best results, it is strongly recommended to measure 6 or more positions so that the measurements have the proper spatial weighting.

Even if the listening environment is small as shown in Example w,

measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment results in more effective correction.

Preparations

When using a subwoofer, make the following settings before starting the auto setup procedure:

• Defeat the volume and crossover controls if possible

• If this is not possible then set

•

Volume: “12 o’clock” position

•

Crossover frequency: “Maximum/Highest Frequency”

•

Low pass ﬁ lter: “Off”

•

Standby mode: “Off”

NOTE

• Do not disconnect the setup microphone until the auto setup procedure is completed.

• When using headphones, unplug the headphones before starting the auto setup procedure.

Auto Setup

To make manual adjustments to the settings, see pages 28, 29.

Connect the included calibrated setup microphone to

the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit.

The auto setup screen appears automatically.

Place the microphone at ear height on a tripod or stand

with the microphone pointing directly up towards the ceiling.

b It is not recommended to hold it in your hand. Be sure that the

path from microphone to the speakers is not blocked by objects. Avoid placing the microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound reﬂ ections may give inaccurate results.

Sound receptor

Setup

microphone

About the main listening position (*M)

The main listening position refers to the most central position where one would normally sit within the listening environment. MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.

Example q Example w

( :Measuring positions)

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Auto Setup

Optimize settings for speakers in use.

F Menu tree F

Auto Setup

a Auto Setup

s Option

d Parameter

Start

Start Auto Setup. The Audyssey MultEQ XT Auto Setup process automatically calculates the size, level, distance, bass management crossover frequency, and optimal settings for each speaker and subwoofer. Audyssey MultEQ XT corrects acoustical distortions within the listening area. Before starting, connect and position all your speakers. Once started, MultEQ XT will play a series of test tones through each speaker.

[Selectable items] 7.1 (B) 7.1 5.1

a Auto Setup

The settings are performed automatically.

GAuto setup ﬂ owH

STEP1: Speaker Detection

STEP2: Measurement (2 to 8 positions)

STEP3: Calculation

STEP4: Check

STEP5: Store

NOTE

Do not turn the power off while the settings are being stored.

STEP2: Measurement

After completing a measurement position, move the microphone to the next position.

Measure at least 6 positions (main listening position and at least 5 other surrounding positions). For best results it is recommend measuring 6

or more positions (with a maximum of 8 positions).

STEP3: Calculation

When “Calculate” is selected at “STEP2”, the measurements taken are analyzed automatically to determine how the speaker system interacts with the room.

The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers connected. The higher the number of speakers, the longer the time required for analysis.

STEP4: Check

Once the auto setup procedure is complete, a measuring result check screen appears. Select any item whose results you want to check to review the results.

Values that are different from the actual distance may be set for speakers with built-in ﬁ lters (subwoofers, etc.). This is because ﬁ lters add electrical delay to the signal that should be compensated.

STEP5: Store

The auto setup measurement results are stored in the AVR-3808.

Conﬁ guration

The speaker system to be measured can be selected ahead of time here.

If an error message appears during the measurements, check “Error Messages” (vpage 27), take the advised action, then start the measurements again.

Setting the correct speaker conﬁ guration can reduce the time required to measure during the auto setup procedure as the system will not have to look for speakers that are not connected.

The speaker connection and polarity are detected at the ﬁ rst measurement position. The following attributes are also determined at this time: “Speaker Size”, “Speaker Distance”, “Channel Level”, “Crossover Frequency”. Once the measurements are completed, the results are displayed.

STEP1 : Speaker Detection

NOTE

• Loud test tone may be played during Audyssey MultEQ XT Automatic Speaker Setup. This is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in room, these test tones will increase in volume.

• Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This will cause inaccurate readings.

• Quiet the listening environment before beginning measurements and refrain from talking. Turn off air conditioning units or other devices that emit noise if at all possible as measurements may be affected by these sounds.

• Operating the MASTER VOLUME knob on the main unit or the VOL +/– buttons on the remote control unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.

• Do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume after “STEP1”.

Amp Assign

Advanced setting : changes power ampliﬁ er assignment.

NOTE

The items selectable at “Conﬁ g.” differ according to the “Amp Assign” settings.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Error Messages

If the auto setup procedure could not be completed due to speaker installation, the measuring environment, etc., an error message is displayed. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform the auto setup procedure over again.

Error messages (examples) Cause Measures

No microphone or speaker • Included setup microphone is not connected.

• Not all speakers could be detected.

• Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC

jack on the main unit.

• Check the speaker connections.

Ambient noise is too high or Level is too low

• Too much noise in the room for accurate measurements to be made.

• Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate measurements to be made.

• Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.

• Try again when the surroundings are quieter.

• Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.

• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.

None • Displayed speaker could not be detected.

· The front L and front R speakers were not properly detected.

· Only one channel of the surround (A) and surround (B) speakers was detected.

· Sound was output from the R channel when only one surround back speaker was connected.

· The surround back or the surround (B) speaker was detected, but the surround (A) speaker was not detected.

• Check the connections of the displayed speaker.

Phase • Displayed speaker connected with the polarities

reversed.

• Check the polarities of the displayed speaker.

• For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure that the wiring is correct, select “Skip”.

NOTE

Be sure to turn the power off before checking the speaker connections.

Room EQ

Select room EQ setting method.

Option

Select settings for room EQ, mic, etc.

[Selectable items] All Assign

Direct Mode

Select room EQ use for DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Mic Select

Select the microphone type if not using supplied mic. The microphone connected to V.AUX Lch is used.

[Selectable items] Mic V.AUX L

Parameter Check

Check auto setup measurement results. This is displayed after the auto setup procedure is completed.

Spkr Conﬁ g Check

Distance Check

Ch. Level Check

Crossover Check

EQ Check

[Items to be checked]

Select “Retry” to make the measurements again.

The auto setup results can be reset to what was originally calculated by MultEQ XT when “Restore” is selected.

Setup

A professionally-calibrated microphone may be used by connecting it to the V.AUX L input on the front panel. This is not recommended as there is no calibration curve applied to the external mic input.



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Make detail settings for various parameters.

Speaker Setup

Use this procedure to set the speakers manually or if you wish to change the settings made with the auto setup procedure.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Speaker Setup

a Speaker Conﬁ guration

s Subwoofer Mode

d Distance

f Channel Level

g Crossover Frequency

h Surround Speaker

Manual Setup

Front

Select front speaker size.

Speaker Conﬁ guration

Select speaker conﬁ guration and size. (bass reproduction capability)

[Selectable items] Large Small

Center

Select center speaker use and size.

[Selectable items] Large Small None

Subwoofer

Select subwoofer use.

[Selectable items] Yes No

Surround A

Select surround speakers A use and size.

[Selectable items] Large Small None

Surround B

Select surround speakers B use and size.

[Selectable items] Large Small

None

Surround Back

Select surround back speaker use and size.

[Selectable items] Large Small None

2spkrs 1spkr

• Select “Large” or “Small” not according to the physical size of the speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities based on the frequency set at “Crossover Frequency” (vpage

29).

• When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to “Yes”.

• If “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.

• If “Surround A” is set to “None”, “Surround B” and “Surround Back” are automatically set to “None”.

• When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).

Subwoofer Mode

Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer.

[Selectable items] LFE LFE+Main

• This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Conﬁ guration” – “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.

• Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.

• Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.

Distance

Set distance from listening position to speakers. Before making the settings, measure the distance from the listening position to the different speakers.

Meters / Feet

Select unit for distance.

Step

Select step. (smallest distance)

[Selectable items]

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.

Distance measurement

Select the speaker you want to set, then set the distance. Set the value closest to the measured distance.

[Variable range]

NOTE

Set the distance between the listening position and the various speakers to no more than 6.00 meters (20.0 ft).

Large

: Select this for a large speaker with strong bass

reproduction.

Small

: Select this for a smaller speaker with weaker bass

reproduction.

Setup

0.1m 0.01m

: Can be selected when “Meters” is set.

1ft 0.1ft

: Can be selected when “Feet” is set.

0.00m ~ 18.00m

: Display when “Meters” is set.

0.0ft ~ 60.0ft

: Display when “Feet” is set.

Surround A Surround B

Surround A+B

Channel Level

Adjust channel levels to obtain equal volume from all speakers.

Mode

Select test tone playback method.

[Selectable items] Auto Manual

Surround

Select surround speaker from which test tone is output.

[Selectable items] A

A+B

Start

Output test tone.

[Variable range]

–12dB

0dB

+12dB

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.

Operating from the main remote control unit

Adjusting with the main remote control unit using the test tones is only possible in the “Auto” mode and only effective in the STANDARD mode. The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the memory.

GAdjusting using test tonesH

q Press the TEST button. Test tones are output from the various speakers. w Use the o p button to adjust so that the volume is equal for all

speakers.

e When the adjustments are completed, press the TEST button

again.

• When the GUI menu “Speaker Conﬁguration” – “Surround Back”

setting (vpage 28) is set to “1spkr”, the surround back speaker display is set to “Surround Back”.

• Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Conﬁguration” settings are not displayed.

• “Surround” can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Conﬁguration” – “Surround A” or “Surround B” is set to “Large” or “Small” (vpage

28).

• When using surround speakers, be sure to adjust the volume of the different speakers.

• When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the different surround modes, use the operation see page 59.

Crossover Frequency

Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal.

[Selectable items]

40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz

120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz

Only the portion of the bass sound of the various speakers output from the subwoofer that has a frequency below the frequency set here is output. Set this according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities of the speakers you are using.

Advanced

Set the crossover frequency separately for the different speakers.

• The “Crossover Frequency” can be set when there are speakers that have been set to “Small” at GUI menu “Speaker Conﬁguration” or when “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes” (vpage 28).

• If GUI menu “Subwoofer Mode” (vpage 28) is set to “LFE”, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Conﬁguration” can be set. If set to “LFE+Main”, this can be set regardless of the size of the speaker.

• For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.

• Always set the crossover frequency to “80 Hz”. When using small speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency to a higher frequency.

Surround Speaker

Select surround speakers to use for each surround mode.

[Selectable items] A

Operating from the main remote control unit

Press the SPKR button.

• This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Conﬁguration” – “Surround

A” and “Surround B” are used (vpage 28).

• When using the pre-out connectors, select and use either “Surround A” or “Surround B”.

• Make the surround speaker settings when the input mode is set to “EXT. IN” at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Audio Setup” – “EXT. IN Setup” (vpage 30).

A+B

About Speaker Type Setting when Using Both Surround speakers A and B

If “Small” is set for either surround speakers A or B, the output is the same as when “Small” is set for both A and B.

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Setup



0

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

i/p Scaler

Make settings for i/p scaler function.

[Selectable items] A to H A to H & H to H OFF

HDMI Setup

Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

HDMI Setup

a i/p Scaler

s Resolution

d Progressive Mode

f Aspect

g Color Space

h RGB Range

j Auto Lip Sync

k Audio

Resolution

Make settings for resolution of HDMI video output signal.

[Selectable items] Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p

NOTE

• It is not possible to convert “1080i” signals into “720p” format.

• It is not possible to convert “720p” signals into “1080i” format.

This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.

Progressive Mode

Select optimum progressive mode for video material.

[Selectable items]

Auto Video1 Video2

This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.

Aspect

This sets the aspect ratio when outputting 480i/576i or 480p/576p input signals from the HDMI output connector.

[Selectable items] Full Normal

This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.

Color Space

Make settings for output color space.

[Selectable items]

YCbCr RGB

When connected to a monitor with a DVI-D connector (HDCP compatible) using an HDMI/DVI converter cable, the signals are output in RGB format, regardless of this setting.

RGB Range

Make settings for RGB output range.

[Selectable items] Normal Enhanced

A to H & H to H setting

• Deep color (10 bit/12 bit) signals are converted into 8-bit signals.

• The i/p scaler function does not work if xvYCC or computer’s resolution signals are input.

Auto Lip Sync

Automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video output.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Audio

Select HDMI audio output device.

[Selectable items]

Amp TV

EXT. IN Setup

Make speaker settings for EXT. IN mode playback.

Audio Setup

Make settings for audio playback.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Audio Setup

a EXT.IN Setup

s 2ch Direct/Stereo

d Downmix Option

f Auto Surround Mode

g Manual EQ

Surround Speaker

Select the surround speakers to use.

[Selectable items] A

A+B

Subwoofer Level

Set the subwoofer level for playback. Select according to the player in use.

[Selectable items] 0dB +5dB +10dB +15dB

We recommend setting to “+15 dB”.

Setup

2ch Direct/Stereo

Make speaker settings for 2-channel mode playback.

Setting

To change the settings, select “Custom”.

[Selectable items] Basic

z: Use the same settings as in “Speaker Setup”.

Custom

Front

Select front speaker size.

[Selectable items]

Large

Small

Subwoofer

Select subwoofer use.

[Selectable items] Yes No

Subwoofer Mode

Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer.

[Selectable items] LFE LFE+Main

Crossover

Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal.

[Selectable items] 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz

110Hz 120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz

Downmix Option

Set dynamic range for downmix playback of Dolby Digital sources.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

• Set this to “ON” if the sound from the front speakers seems distorted.

• When not using the center speaker or surround speakers, the playback sound is down-mixed and output from the front speakers.

Auto Surround Mode

Make setting for memorizing surround mode setting for each input signal type.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

• The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals listed below.

q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals w Dolby Digital and DTS 2-channel signals e Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel signals r Multi-channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS (PCM,

DSD, etc.)

• When playing in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed.

Manual EQ

Adjust tonal quality for each speaker using graphic equalizer.

Adjust CH

Select speaker adjustment method.

[Selectable items] Each L/R All

Manual EQ

Select the speaker and frequency band and adjust the level.

[Selectable items] 63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k

8k 16k

[Variable range] –20dB ~ +6dB

Curve Copy

Copy “Flat” curve from Room EQ.

[Selectable items] Yes No

“Curve Copy” is displayed after the auto setup procedure has been performed.

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Setup

Distance FL

Set distance from listening position to front left speaker.

[Variable range] 0.00m ~ 18.00m

Distance FR

Set distance from listening position to front right speaker.

[Variable range] 0.00m ~ 18.00m





Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Network Setup

Make network settings.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Network Setup

a Network Setup

s Other

d Network Information

Network Setup

Make settings for LAN.

To acquire the IP address automatically

using the DHCP function

To enter the IP address manually

Turn on the AVR-3808’s power.

At the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” – “Detail” setting, set “DHCP” to “OFF” and enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, primary DNS and secondary DNS.

To not pass through the proxy server To connect via proxy server

At the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” – “Proxy” setting, set “Proxy” to “ON” and enter the address or domain name and port numbers.

This setting is required when the network is established via proxy servers.

Recheck the connections and settings if you cannot connect to the Internet (vpage 20).

This completes the setting.

NOTE

Knowledge about networks is required to make the IP address and proxy settings. For details, consult a network administrator.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Other

Make setting for amp power save mode and computer language environment.

Power Saving

Make setting for power saving when not connected to network.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

PC Language

Select computer environment language.

[Selectable items] ara chi (smpl) chi (trad) cze dan

dut eng ﬁ n fre ger gre heb

hun ita jpn kor nor pol por

por (BR) rus spa swe tur

Network Information

Display network information.

[Items to be checked] DHCP= ON or OFF IP Address

MAC Address

Character

Set the character code type of the MP3 ID3-Tag played by USB.

[Selectable items] Auto Latin Japanese

If the characters are not properly displayed when set to “Auto”, set to “Latin” or “Japanese”.

Zone Setup

Make settings for audio playback in a multizone system.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Zone Setup

a ZONE2

s ZONE3

ZONE2

Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 system.

ZONE3

Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE3 system.

Bass

Adjust low frequency range (bass).

[Variable range] –10dB

0dB

+10dB

Treble

Adjust high frequency range (treble).

[Variable range] –10dB

0dB

+10dB

HPF

When using speakers that cannot satisfactorily play low frequencies, distortion of the bass sound can be reduced by setting “HPF” to “ON”.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Lch Level

Adjust the left channel output level.

[Variable range] –12dB

0dB

+12dB

Rch Level

Adjust the right channel output level.

[Variable range] –12dB

0dB

+12dB

Channel

Switch between stereo and mono output.

[Selectable items] Stereo Mono

When GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Amp Assign” (vpage 34) is set to “ZONE (MONO)”, the “Channel” setting is automatically set to “Mono”.

Volume Level

Adjust the main volume level.

[Selectable items] Variable –40dB 0dB

“Variable” is displayed when a power ampliﬁ er is assigned to the ZONE2 output channel at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Amp Assign” (vpage 34).

Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

[Selectable items] OFF –20dB –10dB 0dB

Power On Level

Deﬁ ne the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

[Selectable items] Last – – – –70dB ~ +18dB

Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

[Selectable items] Full –40dB –20dB

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Option Setup

Make various other settings.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Option Setup

a Amp Assign s Volume Control d Source Delete f GUI g Quick Select Name h Trigger Out 1 j Trigger Out 2 k Remote ID l 2Way Remote A0 Dimmer A1 Setup Lock A2 Maintenance Mode A3 Firmware Update

The places where the surround back ampliﬁ er are used can be set freely according to the usage environment. This makes it possible to output sound to rooms other than the room (the main zone) where surround playback is performed (multi-zone playback) or play the sound

with high quality using the front speakers (bi-amp connections).

Amp Assign

Deﬁ ne how the ampliﬁ er for the surround back speaker channels is used.

For details, see “Amp Assign / Multi-Zone Connections and Operations” (vpage 69 ~ 71).

[Selectable items]

7.1CH ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE(MONO) Bi-Amp 2CH

Volume Control

Set the main zone volume setting.

Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

[Selectable items] OFF –20dB –10dB 0dB

Power On Level

This sets the volume set when the main zone’s power is turned on.

[Selectable items] Last – – – –80dB ~ +18dB

Mute Level

This sets the amount of attenuation of the volume when the mute mode is set in the main zone.

[Selectable items]

Full –40dB –20dB

Source Delete

Remove input sources that are not used from the display.

[Selectable items] ON Delete

NOTE

• Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted.

• Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected from GUI menu

“Source Select” or using the SOURCE SELECT knob on the main unit or SOURCE SELECT button on the remote control unit.

GUI

Make GUI related settings.

Screensaver

Make screensaver settings. Use the screensaver to prevent burn-in on the monitor screen. When set to “ON”, the screensaver is activated if there is no activity for about 3 minutes.

[Selectable items]

ON OFF

Wall Paper

Change the GUI background.

[Selectable items] Picture Black Gray Blue

Format

Select the video output signal format to match the monitor.

[Selectable items] PAL NTSC

NOTE

When a format other than the video format of the connected monitor is set, the picture will not be displayed properly. Use the procedure described below to change the video format.

Operating from the main unit

q Press and hold the STATUS and RETURN buttons for at least 3

seconds.

“Video Format” appears on the display.

w Use the o p button to make the setting. e Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting.

Setup

Text

Text information display.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Master Volume

Master volume display during adjustment.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

NET/USB / iPod / Tuner

This sets the time the on-screen display is displayed when an operation is performed.

[Selectable items] Always 30s 10s OFF

Quick Select Name

Change the Quick Select name. Up to 16 characters can be input.

[Input characters]

A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9

! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

Trigger Out 1

Select the conditions to turn on the trigger out 1 with respect to the zone, input source, surround mode, HDMI monitor, etc. For details about the trigger out function, see page 21.

Trigger Out 2

This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 2, in the same way as “Trigger Out 1” above.

[Selectable items] ON – – –

Setting with Respect to the Zone

• When the power of the zone turned on/off, the trigger out turns on.

• Associated with the power supply of zones set to “ON”.

Setting with Respect to the Input Source

• When the input source set to on is selected, the trigger out turns on.

• Associated with respect to the input source for zones set to “ON” at “Setting with Respect to the Zone”.

Setting with Respect to the Surround Mode

• When the surround mode set to on is selected, the trigger out turns on.

• Associated with respect to surround modes that are set to “ON”.

• This can be set if the “MAIN ZONE” setting at “Setting with Respect to the Zone” is set to “ON”.

• Associated when an input source for which “Setting with Respect to the Input Source” is set to “ON” is selected.

Setting with Respect to the Monitor

• When the HDMI monitor set to on is selected, the trigger out turns on.

• Associated with respect to HDMI monitor that are set to “ON”.

• This can be set if the “MAIN ZONE” setting at “Setting with Respect to the Zone” is set to “ON”.

• Associated when an input source for which “Setting with Respect to the Input Source” is set to “ON” is selected.

Remote ID

Set remote control ID. Match the ID setting of the remote control unit and the receiver.

[Selectable items]

• When changing the remote ID, also change the AMP, iPod, TU and NET/DTU modes of the main remote control unit at the same time (vpage 63).

• When changing the remote ID, also change the sub remote control unit at the same time (vpage 68).

2Way Remote

Make setting for 2-way remote control unit.

[Selectable items]

When using a 2-way remote control unit (RC-7000CI and RC-7001RCI, sold separately), set this to “Used”.

Dimmer

Adjust display brightness of the receiver.

[Selectable items] Bright Dim Dark OFF

Operating from the main unit

Press the DIMMER button.

1 2 3 4

Used Not Used

Bright Dim

DarkOFF

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Setup





Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Setup Lock

Protect settings from inadvertent change.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

• When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can no longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you attempt to operate related buttons.

⋅ GUI menu operations ⋅ RESTORER ⋅ Night Mode ⋅ Parameter ⋅ Room EQ ⋅ Channel Level ⋅ Audio Delay ⋅ Video Format / GUI Language

• To cancel the setting, press the MENU button to re-display the “Setup Lock” screen, then change the setting to “OFF”.

Maintenance Mode

This sets the function for maintenance by a DENON serviceperson or installer. (For professional use only.)

NOTE

Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or installer.

This function allows a DENON serviceperson or installer to check the AVR-3808’s status and make settings via the Internet.

Language

This sets the language used on the display screens.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Language

[Selectable items]

English

Deutsch Français

Italiano

Español Nederlands Svenska

Operating from the main unit

b The GUI menu is not displayed when performing this setting.

q Press and hold the STATUS and RETURN buttons for at least 3

seconds.

“Video Format” appears on the display.

w Use the ui button to set “GUI Language”. e Use the o p button to make the setting. r Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting.

NOTE

• Connection to the network and speciﬁ c settings are required to update the ﬁ rmware. For details, see page 20, 32, 33.

• Do not turn off the power until updating is completed.

• Normally there is no need to use this function, aside from the cases described below. ⋅ The Firmware Update function is only used for updating the

ﬁ rmware (free or for a charge) via the Internet, for example for the purpose of adding functions to the AVR-3808 in the future.

⋅ Information regarding the Firmware Update function will be

announced on the DENON web site each time related plans are deﬁ ned.

⋅ A broadband connection to the Internet is required to use this

function (v page 20).

⋅ Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1

hour is required for the updating procedure to be completed. Once updating starts, normal operations on the AVR-3808 cannot be performed until updating is completed.

Furthermore, updating the ﬁ rmware may reset the backup data for

the parameters, etc., set for the AVR-3808.

Display Description

Updating failed Updating failed. Login failed Failure to log into server. Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again. Connection failed Failure connecting to server. Regist failed Failure registering to server.

b If the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network

environment, then update again.

Firmware Update

Update the ﬁ rmware of the receiver.

Start

Execute the update process. When updating starts, the power indicator lights red. “Updating zzz” is shown on the display during updating. Once updating is completed, “Updating complete” is displayed. “Latest ﬁ rmware” is displayed when the ﬁ rmware is the latest version.

[Selectable items]

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Use this procedure to select the input source and make the settings related to playing input sources.

Source Select

Input Source Selection

F Menu tree F

Source Select

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

HDP

TV/CBL

SAT

VCR

DVR

V.AUX

NET/USB

Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit

GOperation on the main unitH

Turn the SOURCE SELECT knob. b If “Rec Select” or “Video Select” is selected for the input source,

press the SOURCE button before turning the SOURCE SELECT knob.

GOperation on the main remote control unitH

Press the SOURCE SELECT button. The desired input source can be selected directly.

(Main unit) (Main remote control unit)

Play

The playback screen is displayed.

[Input source]

[Selectable items] Start

TUNER NET/USB

(

iPod

)

Auto Preset

Use the auto preset function to program radio stations.

[Input source] TUNER

If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.

Settings Related to Playing Input Sources

F Menu tree F

Source Select

TUNER

a Play s Auto Preset d Preset Skip f Preset Name g Input Mode h Rename j Other

PHONO

g Input Mode h Rename j Other

CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR, V.AUX

a Play

k Playback Mode (iPod)

l Assign g Input Mode h Rename j Other

NET/USB

a Play A0 Playback Mode g Input Mode h Rename j Other

[Selectable items] ON Skip

Preset Skip

Set the preset memories that you do not want to display when tuning.

[Input source] TUNER

When set “All” to “Skip”, it is possible to skip entire preset memory blocks (A to G).

A ~ G

Select the preset channel(s) you do not want to display.

[Selectable items]

All 1

2 3 4 5 6 7

z : “Play” and “Playback Mode (iPod)” are displayed for input sources

for which “iPod dock” is assigned.

To operate the AVR-3808 using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 60 “Remote Control Unit Operations”).

Setup

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Preset Name

Assign name to a preset memory. Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.

A1 ~ G8

Select the preset memory number.

[Input source] TUNER

Setup

[Characters that can be input]

A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

Input Mode

Make input mode and decode mode settings for this source. The selectable input modes depend on the input source and “Assign” setting (vpage 39).

Input Mode

Set the input mode for this source.

[Input source] TUNER PHONO

[Selectable items]

[Input source] NET/USB

[Selectable items]

[Input source]

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX

[Selectable items]

Auto

HDMI Digital Analog EXT. IN

Analog

Auto

EXT. IN

Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit

Press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or the INPUT button on the main remote control unit.

Auto

EXT. IN

z1: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu

“Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” (vpage 39). Excluding CD.

z2: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu

“Assign” setting is set to “Digital” (vpage 39).

HDMI

Analog

Digital

Decode Mode

Set the decode mode for this source.

[Input source] CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR

DVR V.AUX

[Selectable items] Auto PCM DTS

iPod

(

)

• This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu “Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” or “Digital” (vpage 39).

• Only set “PCM” and “DTS” when playing the respective signals.

Other

Make various other settings.

Video Select

Switch video input source while listening to audio signal.

[Selectable items]

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX

Operating from the main unit

Press the VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the SOURCE SELECT knob until the desired picture appears. b To cancel, press the main unit’s VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the

main unit’s SOURCE SELECT knob and select “Source”.

Source

NOTE

• It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.

• When playing HDMI video input signals, the analog video signal of another input source cannot be selected for the HDMI video output.

• Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete” cannot be selected.

Video Convert

Automatically convert video input signal to monitor output format.

[Input source] DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR

Rename

V.AUX

Change the display name for this source. Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.

[Characters that can be input]

A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

[Selectable items]

NOTE

When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to “OFF”.

OFF

Source Level

Corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input.

• When a digital signal is properly input, the “ ” or “ ” indicator lights on the display. If the “ ” indicator does not light, check the digital input connector assignment and the connections.

• The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “EXT. IN”.



[Variable range]

For input sources for which “HDMI” and “Digital” are set at the GUI menu “Assign” setting, the analog input level and digital input level can be set separately.

–12dB

0dB

+12dB

Playback Mode (iPod)

Make settings for “iPod” playback.

Repeat

Make settings for repeat mode.

[Input source]

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR

DVR V.AUX

[Selectable items]

All One OFF

Shufﬂe

Make settings for shufﬂe mode.

[Input source]

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR

DVR V.AUX

[Selectable items]

This can be selected for input sources for which “Assign” is assigned at the “iPod dock” setting.

Assign

Songs Albums OFF

Assign input sources to input connectors.

HDMI

Select HDMI connector to assign to this source.

[Input source]

[Selectable items]

Input source

Default setting

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX

HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 None None HDMI4 None

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR

DVR V.AUX

1 2 3 4 None

• With HDMI, the video and audio signals are transferred simultaneously. When HDMI is assigned to an input source, the audio signal switches to HDMI along with the video signal. To use with the digital audio input connectors assigned, set GUI menu “Input Mode” to “Digital” (vpage 38).

• When the AVR-3808 and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, if the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.

• The audio signals input from the analog, digital and EXT. IN connectors are not output to the monitor.

NOTE

This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.

Digital

Select digital input connector to assign to this source.

[Input source]

[Selectable items]

Input source Default setting

z: When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX

Coaxial 3Coaxial

connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK”.

NOTE

• This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.

• When “DENON LINK” is assigned at the GUI menu “Assign” setting, the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server and USB) input from the digital input connectors cannot be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors and the analog REC OUT connectors.

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT

VCR DVR V.AUX

Coaxial1 ~ 3 Optical1 ~ 4

DENON LINKz None

Coaxial 2Optical 1Optical 3Optical 2Optical

None

Component

Select component video input to assign to this source.

[Input source]

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR

DVR V.AUX

[Selectable items]

Input source Default setting

This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX

Component 1Component 2Component

1 2 3 None

None None None None

iPod dock

Assign Control Dock for iPod to this source.

[Input source]

[Selectable items]

• With the default settings, the Control Dock for iPod can be used connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.

• Even if “iPod dock” is set to “Assign”, if the set is not connected to a Control dock for iPod, the input source can be used as the normal input source.

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR

DVR V.AUX

Assign None

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Setup



0

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Front Rear

All One OFF

ON OFF

Playback Mode

Make settings for “NET/USB” playback.

[Input source]

USB Select

Select USB port to use.

[Selectable items]

Repeat

Make settings for repeat mode.

Random

Make random mode settings.

Favorites All Music

Direct Play

Set the folder to be played using the DIRECT PLAY button on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items]

Match the port to be used and the setting.

Input signal Display

Dolby

Digital

Source

DOLBY DIGITAL

(other than 2ch) /

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx CINEMA

DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx MUSIC

DOLBY DIGITAL

Plus

DOLBY DIGITAL +

DOLBY TrueHD DOLBY TrueHD

DTS

Surround

Source

DTS (5.1ch) /

DTS-ES Discrete

6.1 /

DTS-ES Matrix

6.1 /

DTS 96/24

DTS SURROUND DTS+PLgx CINEMA

DTS+PLgx MUSIC DTS+NEO:6 DTS ES MTRX6.1 (z1) DTS ES DSCRT6.1 (z2) DTS 96/24 (z3)

DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio

DTS-HD HI RES

DTS-HD Master

Audio

DTS-HD MSTR

DVD-

Audio,

SACD

PCM (multi ch) /

DSD (multi ch)

MULTI CH IN MULTI IN+PLgx CINEMA MULTI IN+PLgx MUSIC

MULTI CH IN 7.1

Select the “Cinema”, “Music”, “Game” and “Pro Logic” modes at GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” (vpage 42).

z1 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”

and the AVR-3808’s “AFDM” setting is set to “ON”.

z2 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Discrete

6.1”.

z3 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS 96/24”.

For details, see page 78.

STANDARD

This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format and playing surround sound. The display when the STANDARD mode is selected depends on the input signal and surround back output playback mode.

[Selectable items]

Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)

DOLBY PLgx

DTS NEO:6

Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources

[Selectable items]

• When not using a surround back speaker

DOLBY PLg

DTS NEO:6

DOLBY PLgx

or DOLBY PLg

: The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLgx or

DOLBY PLg for playback.

Cinema

: This mode is suited for movie sources.

Music

: This mode is suited for music sources.

Game

: This mode is suited for games.

Pro Logic

: This is the Pro Logic playback mode. This can

be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLg decoder. When this mode is selected, “DOLBY PL” is displayed.

DTS NEO:6

: The signals are decoded in DTS NEO:6 for

playback.

Cinema

: This mode is suited for movie sources.

Music

: This mode is suited for music sources.

[Selectable items]

Standard Playback

This is the standard mode for enjoying surround sound according to the program source.

Surround Modes

• When using a surround back speaker

To select these surround modes using the buttons on the main unit and main remote control unit, press the STANDARD button. The mode switches each time the button is pressed.

Setup

NET/USB

DSP Simulation Playback

The desired mode according to the program source and viewing situation can be selected from among 10 DENON original surround modes. The surround parameters can be adjusted (vpage 76, 77) to achieve an even more realistic, powerful sound ﬁeld.

Stereo Playback

[Selectable items]

STEREO

This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted. Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Playback in the PURE DIRECT Mode

This is the mode that recreates the original sound most faithfully, providing extremely high quality sound.

Press the PURE DIRECT button.

[Selectable items]

7CH STEREO

WIDE SCREEN

SUPER STADIUM

ROCK ARENA

JAZZ CLUB

CLASSIC CONCERT

MONO MOVIE

VIDEO GAME

MATRIX

VIRTUAL

: This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from

all speakers.

: This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of

viewing a movie on a large screen.

: This mode is suited for viewing sports

programs.

: This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a

live concert in an arena.

: This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a

live concert in a jazz club.

: This mode is for appreciating classical concert

programs.

: This mode is for playing monaural movie

sources with surround sound.

: This mode is suited for achieving surround

sound with video games.

: This mode lets you add a sense of expansion

to stereo music sources.

: This mode is for enjoying surround effects

using only the front speakers or headphones.

z: When playing sources recorded in monaural in the MONO MOVIE

mode, the sound will be off balance with a single channel (left or right), so input to both channels.

• To select these surround modes using the buttons on the main

remote control unit, press the SIMU button. The mode switches each time the button is pressed.

• Depending on the program source being played, it may not be possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect. In this case, try other modes to achieve a sound ﬁeld suited to your tastes.

Direct Playback

[Selectable items]

DIRECT

In this mode the signals bypass the tone adjustment circuitry for high quality sound. The sound is output to the same channels as the input signal. The display when the DIRECT mode is selected depends on the input signal. For multi-channel sources, the display depends on the surround back output’s play mode.

z : When DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the

For details, see page 79.

Input signal

Analog signal /

PCM (2ch) /

Dolby Digital source /

DTS source /

Other 2-channel digital signals

DSD (2ch) DSD DIRECT (z)

PCM (multi ch)

DSD (multi ch) DSD MULTI DIRECT (z)

audio parameters and speaker settings, “DIRECT” or “MULTI CH DIRECT” is displayed.

DIRECT

MULTI CH DIRECT M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC M DIRECT 7.1

Display

• When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the GUI screen is not displayed and the display on the main unit is turned off.

• If the HDMI input connector is selected, video outputs are output in the PURE DIRECT mode.

• The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode.

Setup





Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Parameter

Cinema Music Game

Pro Logic

Audio

Adjust various audio parameters.

F Menu tree F

Parameter

Audio

a Surround Parameters s Tone d Room EQ f RESTORER g Night Mode h Audio Delay

Cinema Music

Parameters can be called out directly by pressing the PARA button on the main remote control unit.

Surround Parameters

Adjust surround sound parameters. The adjustable parameters differ for the different surround modes (vpage 76, 77).

Mode

Select the mode according to the playback source.

[Selectable items]

In the PLgx or PLg mode:

In the DTS NEO:6 mode:

z: Can be selected in the PLg mode.

The “Music” mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot of stereo music.

~ 3 ~

Dimension

Shift sound image center to front or rear, to adjust playback balance.

[Variable range]

~ 3 ~

0 ms

30 ms

300 ms

Delay Time

Adjust delay time to control sound stage size.

Effect

Switch effect signal for multi-surround speakers on and off.

Center Width

Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound.

[Variable range]

ON OFF[Selectable items]

–10dB

0dB

0.0

0.3

1.0

Cinema EQ

Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding.

D.COMP

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

LFE

Adjust the low-frequency effects level (LFE).

Center Image

Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound.

Panorama

Assign front L/R signal also to surround channels, for wider sound.

[Selectable items]

[Variable range]

[Variable range][Selectable items]

[Selectable items]

ON OFF

OFF Low Middle High

When playing DTS sources, this is only displayed for compatible software.

For proper playback of the different program sources, we recommend setting to the values below.

• Dolby Digital sources: “0 dB”

• DTS movie sources: “0 dB”

• DTS music sources: “–10 dB”

DRC

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

[Selectable items] Auto Low Middle High OFF

This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.

Setup

Effect Level

Adjust effect signal level.

[Variable range]

Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals seems unnatural.

~ 10 ~

Room Size

Determine size of acoustic environment.

[Selectable items]

Small Medium small Medium

Medium large Large

NOTE

“Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played.

AFDM

Auto-select surround mode by source. This function only works for software containing a special identiﬁcation signal. If the software being played is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES, it is played in 6.1-channels. If not, it is played in 5.1-channels.

ON OFF[Selectable items]

Example : Playing Dolby Digital software (with EX ﬂag)

• When “AFDM” is set to “ON”, the surround mode is automatically

set to the DOLBY + PLgx CINEMA mode.

• To play in the Dolby Digital EX mode, set “AFDM” to “OFF” and “SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON”.

SB CH Out (for Multi-channel sources)

Select playback mode for surround back channels.

[Selectable items]

NON MTRX MTRX ON PLIIx CINEMA

ES MTRX

z1: This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs”

z2: This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs”

z3: This can be selected when playing DTS sources. z4: This can be selected when playing DTS sources including a

ES DSCRT

at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” – “Speaker Conﬁguration” setting (vpage 28).

or “1spkr” at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” –“Speaker Conﬁguration” setting.

discrete 6.1-channel signal identiﬁcation signal.

OFF

PLIIx MUSIC

SB CH Out (for 2-channel sources)

Determine whether to use surround back speakers.

ON OFF[Selectable items]

Subwoofer Att.

Attenuate subwoofer level when using EXT. IN mode.

ON OFF[Selectable items]

Set this to “ON” if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when playing Super Audio CD.

Subwoofer

Turn subwoofer output on and off.

Tone

Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.

Tone Defeat

Turn tone adjustments off.

ON OFF[Selectable items]

The tone cannot be adjusted when in the DIRECT mode.

Bass

Adjust low frequency range (bass).

[Variable range]

–6dB ~ +6dB

Treble

Adjust high frequency range (treble).

[Variable range]

“Bass” and “Treble” can be set when “Tone Defeat” is set to “OFF”.

–6dB ~ +6dB

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Setup

Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX ﬂags. If the playback mode does not switch automatically even when “AFDM” is set to “ON”, set “SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON” or “PLgx CINEMA”.

ON OFF[Selectable items]

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Mode 1

(RESTORER 64)

Mode 2

(RESTORER 96)

Mode 3

(RESTORER HQ)

Room EQ

Select room equalizer for current environment.

[Selectable items]

: Optimize frequency response of all speakers.

: Optimize frequency response of speakers

except front L and R speakers.

: Optimize frequency response of all speakers to

ﬂat response.

: Apply frequency response set with “Manual

EQ”.

: Turn equalizer off.

Setup

Audyssey

Audyssey Byp. L/R

Audyssey Flat

Manual

OFF

Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit

Press the ROOM EQ button on the main unit or the EQ button on the main remote control.

Audyssey

OFF Manual

When “Audyssey” is selected, “ ” lights.

When “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected, or when the auto setup measuring results have changed, “ ” lights.

• “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be selected after the auto setup procedure has been performed.

• If the settings of the speakers for which “None” has been determined at “Auto Setup” are changed, “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” cannot be selected and measurements have to be taken again to include the newly-added speakers.

• When using headphones, “Room EQ” is always set to “OFF”.

Audyssey Byp. L/R

Audyssey Flat

RESTORER

This function restores compressed audio signals to how they were before compression and corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer playback sound.

[Selectable items]

OFF

Mode1

Mode2

Mode3

The default setting for “NET/USB” and “iPod” is “Mode3”. All others are set to “OFF”.

(RESTORER 64)

(RESTORER 96)

(RESTORER HQ)

Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit

During playback, press the RESTORER button on the main unit or the RSTR button on the main remote control unit.

When set to something other than “OFF”, “ ” is displayed.

OFF

About the RESTORER function

• Such compressed audio formats as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio

signals.

• This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input source is set to “NET/USB” or when analog signals (including AM/ FM signals) or PCM signals (fs = 44.1/48 kHz) are input.

Night Mode

Optimized setting for late-night listening.

[Selectable items]

Operating from the main remote control unit

Press the NGT button. The “ ” indicator lights when “Low”, “Middle” or “High” is

selected.

OFF

Audio Delay

OFF Low Middle High

Low Middle

High

Compensate for mismatched timing between video and audio.

Delay audio. This sets the delay time for audio signals.

[Variable range]

Operating from the main unit or main remote

0 ms

200 ms

control unit

q Press the AUDIO DELAY button on the main unit or the A. DL button

on the main remote control unit.

w Use the o p button to set.

• This cannot be adjusted when playing in the EXT. IN, DIRECT or STEREO mode (with “Front” set to “Large”, “Tone Defeat” to “ON” and “Room EQ” to “OFF”.)

• The adjustment range is 0 to 100 ms when the Auto Lipsync Correction function is activated.





Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Information

Power Select Source Volume Level

Select Source Name Surround Mode Input Mode

Assign Room EQ Video Select Src Level Rec Select

Night Mode RESTORER

etc.

Status

Shows information about current settings.

F Menu tree F

Information

Status

a MAIN ZONE

s ZONE2/3

MAIN ZONE

Shows information about settings for main zone. The items displayed differ according to the input source.

ZONE2/3

Shows information about settings for multi-zone.

[Items to be checked]

Audio Input Signal

Shows information about audio input signals.

F Menu tree F

Information

Audio Input Signal

Surround Mode

: The currently set surround mode is displayed.

Signal

: The input signal type is displayed.

: The input signal’s sampling frequency is

displayed.

Format

: The number of channels in the input signal (front,

surround, LFE) is displayed.

Offset

: The dialogue normalization correction value is

displayed.

Flag

: “MATRIX” is displayed if the input signal has

undergone matrix processing, “DISCRETE” if the input signal has undergone discrete processing.

Dialogue normalization function

This is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital sources. This function automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources. The correction value can be checked using the STATUS button on the main unit.

The ﬁ gure is the correction value when the standard level is corrected.

[Items to be checked]

–6

~ 0 ~

+12

Picture Adjust

Adjust the picture quality.

F Menu tree F

Parameter

Picture Adjust

a Contrast s Brightness d Chroma Level f Hue

[Variable range]

–6

~ 0 ~

–6

~ 0 ~

Contrast

Adjust picture contrast.

• Adjusting the “Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Chroma Level” and “Hue” settings does not affect the HDMI input signal.

• “Hue” can be adjusted for composite video and S-Video signals.

• The adjustment values are stored for the individual input sources.

Brightness

Adjust picture brightness.

Chroma Level

Adjust picture chroma level (saturation).

Hue

Adjust color hue.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Quick Select

Shows information about quick select settings.

F Menu tree F

Information

Quick Select

Preset Station

Shows information about preset stations.

F Menu tree F

Information

Preset Station

Select Source Input Mode Room EQ

Auto Surround Mode setting Volume Level

A1 ~ G8

[Items to be checked]

[Input source]

For instructions on storing settings at Quick Select 1 to 3, see page

59.

When the STATUS button on the main unit is pressed, the set’s status can be checked on the display.

Analog/PCM 2ch Digital 2ch Digital 5.1ch Multi ch

Auto Surround

Shows information about auto surround mode settings. The surround mode for which the last memory function was used for the different input signal types is displayed.

F Menu tree F

Information

Auto Surround

[Items to be checked]

Resolution Color Space Pixel Depth

HDMI Information

Shows information about HDMI input/output signals and monitor.

F Menu tree F

Information

HDMI Information

a Signal Information s Monitor

Interface Supported resol.

[Items to be checked]

Signal Information

The HDMI input/output signal information is displayed.

Monitor

The HDMI monitor information is displayed.

Setup

TUNER NET/USB



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

<PHONES>SOURCE SELECT MASTER VOLUME

Playback

Playing Video and Audio Equipment

Prepare the equipment.

q Load the DVD, CD or other software in the player. (vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.) w To play a video device, switch the monitor input. (vSee the monitor’s operating instructions.)

To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the AMP mode.

(vpage 60 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

Use SOURCE SELECT to select the input source.

: “Source Select” (vpage 37)

Start playback.

(vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.)

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Preparations

Press <POWER>.

The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the standby mode.

Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER ON].

The power indicator ﬂ ashes green and the power turns on.

To operate the AVR-3808 using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 60 “Remote Control Unit Operations”).

Turning the Power Off

q Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER OFF].

The power is set to the standby mode.

w Press <POWER>.

The power indicator turns off, and so does the power.

NOTE

Power continues to be supplied to some of the circuitry even when the power is in the standby mode. When leaving home for long periods of time or when traveling, either press <POWER> to turn off the power, or unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

Turning the Power On

Either turn <MASTER VOLUME> or press [MASTER

VOLUME].

Press [MUTE].

To cancel, press [MUTE] again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting the master volume.

Plug the headphones into <PHONES>.

The sound from the speakers and pre-out connectors is automatically cut.

NOTE

Be careful not to set the volume too high when using headphones.

Operations During Playback

Adjusting the Master Volume

Turning Off the Sound Temporarily (Muting)

Listening with Headphones

Basic Operation

[POWER ON]

[MUTE]

[POWER OFF]

MASTER VOLUME

SOURCE SELECT

[ AMP]

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory)

Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.

Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.

Press [MEMO].

Press [A ~ G] to select the block in which the station is

to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the preset number.

b The memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT].

Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting.

• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.

• Stations can be preset automatically at GUI menu “Source Select”

– “Tuner” – “Auto Preset” (vpage 37).

NOTE

Preset stations are erased by overwriting them.

Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]

(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

: ”Source Select” (vpage 37)

To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 60 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”.

Tune in the desired broadcast station.

q To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning)

Press [MODE] to light the “AUTO” indicator on the display, then use [df] to select the station you want to hear.

w To tune in manually (Manual Tuning)

Press [MODE] to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then use [df] to select the station you want to hear.

Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts

• It is also possible to switch to “FM” or “AM” in step 1 by pressing

[TUNER].

• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in manually.

• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [df] to change frequencies continuously.

• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner” (vpage

35).

Basic Operation

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

[ TU]

[SEARCH]

[TUNER]

[SHIFT]

[df]

[1 ~ 8]

[BAND]

[A ~ G]

[MODE]

[MEMO]

[CHANNEL]

(AMP mode),

( mode)

Playback

Listening to Preset Stations

Operation on the Main Unit

Press <TUNING PRESET>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT> to select the preset radio station.

Operation on the Main Remote Control Unit

Press [A ~ G] to select the memory block.

Press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the desired preset

channel.

n Default settings

Auto tuner presets

A1 ~ A8

B1 ~ B8

C1 ~ C8

D1 ~ D8

E1 ~ E8

F1 ~ F8

G1 ~ G8

87.5 / 89.1 / 98.1 / 108.0 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 /

90.1 MHz

522 / 603 / 999 / 1404 / 1611 kHz,

90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 MHz

90.1 MHz

RDS (Radio Data System)

Note that the RDS function only works when receiving RDS compatible stations. RDS (works only on the FM band) is a broadcasting service which allows a station to send additional information along with the regular radio program signal. The following three types of RDS information can be received with this unit:

Program Type (PTY)

PTY identiﬁes the type of RDS program. The program types and their displays are as follows:

NEWS News AFFAIRS Current Affairs INFO Information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Varied POP M Pop Music ROCK M Rock Music

EASY M

LIGHT M Light Classical CLASSICS Serious Classical OTHER M Other Music

Easy Listening Music

WEATHER Weather FINANCE Finance

CHILDREN

SOCIAL Social Affairs RELIGION Religion PHONE IN Phone In TRAVEL Travel LEISURE Leisure JAZZ Jazz Music COUNTRY Country Music NATION M National Music OLDIES Oldies Music FOLK M Folk Music DOCUMENT Documentary

Children’s programmes

RDS Search

Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide the RDS service.

Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]

(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 60 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

Press [SEARCH] to select “RDS”.

Press [CHANNEL].

The search for RDS stations begins automatically.

b If no RDS stations are found with the above operation, all the

reception bands are searched.

b When a broadcast station is found, that station’s name appears on

the display.

To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 3.

b If no RDS station is found when all the frequencies have been

searched, “NO RDS” is displayed.

Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Playback

Trafﬁc Program (TP)

TP identiﬁes programs that carry trafﬁc announcements. This allows you to easily ﬁnd out the latest trafﬁc conditions in your area before leaving home.

Radio Text (RT)

RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the display.

NOTE

The operations described below using [SEARCH] will not function in areas in which there are no RDS broadcasts.



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

[ AMP]

[iPod]

[TUNER]

<ON/STANDBY> uiop

[SEARCH]

uiop

[CHANNEL]

[ TU]

Playback

( mode)

PTY Search

Use this function to ﬁnd RDS stations broadcasting a designated program type (PTY). For a description of each program type, refer to “Program Type (PTY)”.

Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]

(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 60 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

Press [SEARCH] to select “PTY”.

Watching the display, press ui to call out the desired

program type.

Press [CHANNEL].

PTY search begins automatically.

b If there is no station broadcasting the designated program type

with the above operation, all the reception bands are searched.

b The station name is displayed on the display after searching

stops.

TP Search

Use this function to ﬁnd RDS stations broadcasting trafﬁc programs (TP stations).

Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]

(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 60 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

Press [SEARCH] to select “TP”.

Press [CHANNEL].

TP search begins automatically.

b If no TP station is found with the above operation, all the reception

bands are searched.

b The station name is displayed on the display after searching

stops.

To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 3.

b If no other TP station is found when all the frequencies have been

searched, “NO PROGRAMME” is displayed.

0

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 4.

b If no station broadcasting the designated program type is found

when all the frequencies have been searched, “NO PROGRAMME” is displayed.



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]

(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 60 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

Press [SEARCH] to select “RT”.

b While receiving an RDS broadcast station, the text data broadcast

from the station is displayed.

b To turn the display off, press op. b If no text data is being broadcast, “NO TEXT DATA” is displayed.

RT (Radio Text)

“RT” appears on the display when radio text data is received.

iPod® Playback

The music on an iPod can be played by using the Control Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately). The operation can also be performed using the buttons on the main unit or remote control unit while watching the GUI menus.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

b The iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not

copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally permitted for your private use as an individual. Be sure to comply with applicable copyright legislation.

Make the necessary preparations.

q Set the iPod in the DENON Control Dock for iPod. (vSee the Control Dock for iPod’s operating instructions.) w Assign the Control Dock for iPod’s input.

Assign the Control Dock for iPod’s input.

: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Assign”–

”iPod dock” (vpage 39)

Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [iPod] (AMP

mode) to select the input source assigned in step 1-w above.

(iPod screen)

b If the screens above are not displayed, the iPod may not be

properly connected. Try connecting again.

: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Play”

(vpage 37)

To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the iPod mode.

(vpage 60 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

OK to disconnect.

Basic Operation

NOTE

• Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not operate.

• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod data.

• With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.

• Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio ﬁ les and achieve a richer sound. The default setting is “Mode3”.

• Press <ON/STANDBY> and set the AVR-3808’s power to the standby mode before disconnecting the iPod. Also switch the input source to one to which the GUI menu “iPod dock” is not assigned before disconnecting the iPod.

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Shufﬂ ing playback

Press [CHANNEL +] or [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] Albums

Songs OFF

: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” –

”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Shufﬂ e” (vpage 39)

Searching up or down pages

Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p (up). To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].

To switch between the Browse and Remote modes

Either press and hold [SEARCH].

• The title name, artist name and album name can be checked by pressing <STATUS> during playback.

• On the AVR-3808, folder and ﬁ le names can be displayed as titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ . (period)”.

• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “iPod” (vpage

35).

Listening to Music

Use ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p

to select the music  le to be played.

Press ENTER or p.

Playback starts.

Stopping playback temporarily

During playback, press ENTER or [1]. Press again to resume playback.

Fast-forwarding or fast-reversing

During playback, either press and hold u (to fast-reverse) or i (to fastforward), or press [6] or [7].

To cue to the beginning of a track

During playback, either press u (to cue to the previous track) or i (to cue to the next track), or press [8] or [9].

To stop

During playback, either press and hold ENTER or press [2].

Playing repeatedly

Press [CHANNEL –] or [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] All One OFF

: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” –

”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Repeat” (vpage 39)

Press and hold [SEARCH] to set the Remote mode.

Watching the iPod’s screen, use ui to select

“Photos” or “Videos”.

Press ENTER until the image you want to view is

displayed.

“TV Out” at the iPod’s “Slideshow Settings” or “Video Settings” must be set to “On” in order to display the iPod’s photo data or videos on the monitor. For details, see the iPod’s operating instructions.

ENTER

uiop

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

[8], [9], [6], [7], [1], [2]

[ iPod]

[SEARCH]

[CHANNEL+/–]

uiop

ENTER

(Main remote control unit)

(Sub remote control unit)

[8]

[REPEAT]

[RANDOM]

[9]

[2]

[1/3]

Playback

Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod

Photo and video data on the iPod can be viewed on the monitor. (Only for iPod equipped with slideshow or video functions.)

Playing Network Audio or USB Memory Devices

This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations or music ﬁles stored on a computer or USB memory device.

n About the Internet radio function

• Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet. Internet radio stations from around the world can be tuned in.

The AVR-3808 is equipped with the following Internet radio

functions:

· Stations can be selected by genre and region.

· Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.

· Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media Audio)

format can be listened to.

· Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an

exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a computer.

b The function is managed for individual users, so you must

provide your MAC or e-mail address.

Exclusive URL: http://www.radiodenon.com b The radio station database service may be suspended without

notice.

• The AVR-3808’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio station database service (vTuner). This database service provides a list edited and created for the AVR-3808.

vTuner services may be discontinued without notice.

n Music server

This function lets you play music ﬁles and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a computer (music server) connected to the AVR-3808 via a network. With the AVR-3808’s network audio playback function, connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies below.

· Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service

· Windows Media DRM10

n USB memory devices

A USB memory device can be connected to the AVR-3808’s USB port to play music ﬁles stored on the USB memory device.

· Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the AVR-3808.

· The AVR-3808 is compatible with USB memor y devices in “FAT16” or “FAT32” format.

[Compatible formats]

Internet

radio

WMA (Windows

Media Audio)

MP3 (MPEG-1

Audio Layer-3)

WAV –

MPEG-4 AAC –

FLAC (Free

Lossless Audio

Codec)

A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music ﬁles via a network.

z: Only ﬁles that are not protected by copyright can be played on the

AVR-3808. Contents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, ﬁles encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc., on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.

b Music server and USB

· The AVR-3808 is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standards.

· The AVR-3808 is compatible with WMA META tags.

S S S

–

Music server

USB

S S

[Playable formats]

Sampling frequency

WMA (Windows

Media Audio)

MP3 (MPEG-1

Audio Layer-3)

WAV 32/44.1/48 kHz – .wav

MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16~320 kbps .aac/.m4a/.mp4

FLAC (Free

Lossless Audio

Codec)

WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.

32/44.1/48 kHz 48~192 kbps .wma

32/44.1/48 kHz 32~320 kbps .mp3

32/44.1/48 kHz – .ﬂac

Bit rate Extension

Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Playback

Installing Windows Media Player ver. 11

q If Windows XP Service Pack 2 has not yet been installed, either

download it free of charge from Microsoft or install it via a Windows update installer.

w Download the latest version of Windows Media Player ver.

11, either directly from Microsoft or using a Windows update installer.

b When using Windows Vista, there is no need to download a new

version of Windows Media Player.





Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Stopping playback temporarily

During playback, press ENTER. Press again to resume playback.

To stop

During the play or pause mode, press and hold ENTER.

Searching up or down pages

Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p (up). To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].

Searching by ﬁ rst letter (Character search)

This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens for Internet radio stations or ﬁ les stored on the computer.

q When the menu screen is displayed, press [SEARCH] twice. w Use o p to select the ﬁ rst letter you want to search for.

If there are multiple items starting with the selected letter, they are displayed in alphabetical order. If it is not possible to search the list, “Unsorted list...” is displayed.

• Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio ﬁ les and achieve a richer sound. The default setting is “Mode3”.

• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “NET/USB” (vpage 35).

• The display can be switched between the artist name, track name, album name.

ENTER

<SOURCE SELECT> uiop

[NET/USB]

[ NET/DTU]

ENTER

[SEARCH]

[1 ~ 8]

[A ~ G]

[MEMO]

uiop

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Make the necessary preparations.

q Check the network environment, then turn on the AVR-3808’s

power. (vpage 20 “Network Audio”)

w If settings are required, make the network settings.

(vpage 32, 33 “Network Setup”)

e Prepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions)

Install “Windows Media Player ver. 11”.

Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [NET/USB]

(AMP mode) to select “NET/USB”.

: “Source Select” –“NET/USB” –“Play”

(vpage 37)

To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the NET/DTU ( ) mode.

(vpage 60 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

Use ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p

to select the  le you want to play.

Press ENTER or p.

Playback starts.

Basic Operation

• There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the tracks varies widely.

Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but

depending on the communication lines and server trafﬁ c, the music or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted.

Inversely, lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less

tendency for the sound to be interrupted.

• “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is busy or not broadcasting.

• On the AVR-3808, folder and ﬁ le names can be displayed as titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ . (period)”.

Use ui to select “Internet Radio”, then press ENTER

or p.

Use ui to select the item you want to play, then

press ENTER or p.

The station list is displayed. A “ ” mark is indicated in front of stations that can be played.

Use ui to select the station, then press ENTER or

Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

Listening to Internet Radio

(AMP mode)

( mode)

Playback

Recently Played Internet Radio Stations

Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from “Recently Played” in top menu.

Use ui to select “Recently Played”, then press

ENTER or p.

Use ui to select the item you want to play, then

press ENTER or p.

NOTE

Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.

Presetting Internet Radio Stations

Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.

While the Internet radio station you want to preset is

playing, press [MEMO].

Use ui to select “Preset”, then press ENTER.

Press [A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8] to select the desired

preset number.

The Internet radio station is now preset.

NOTE

If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously registered setting is cleared.

Listening to Preset Internet Radio Stations

With the input source set to “NET/USB”, press [A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8].

The AVR-3808 automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins.

Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites

Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily.

Press [MEMO] while the Internet radio station you

want to register is playing.

Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.

Press o to select “Yes”.

The Internet radio station is registered.

If you do not want to register it, press p.

Listening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in Your Favorites

Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or

Use ui to select the Internet radio station, then

press ENTER or p.

The AVR-3808 automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins.

Clearing Internet Radio Stations from Your Favorites

Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or

Use ui to select the Internet radio station you want

to clear, then press [MEMO].

Press o to select “Delete”.

The selected Internet radio station is cleared.

To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p.

Playing Files Stored on a Computer

Use this procedure to play music ﬁles or playlists.

Use ui to select the host name of the computer on

which the music le you want to play is located, then press ENTER or p.

Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press

ENTER or p.

A “ ” mark is indicated in front of music ﬁles that can be played.

Use ui to select the le, then press ENTER or p.

Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

Selecting tracks

During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track).

• Connections to the required system and speciﬁc settings must be made in order to play music ﬁles (vpage 20).

• Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software and set the ﬁles as server contents. For details, see the operating instructions of your server software.

Playing ﬁles that have been Preset or Registered in Your Favorites

Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using the same operations as for Internet radio stations.

NOTE

• Presettings are erased by overwriting them.

• When the operation described below is performed, the music server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play preset or favorite music ﬁles.

• When you quit the music server and then restart it.

• When music ﬁles are deleted or added on the music server.

Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Playback





Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

INPUT MODE

uipENTER

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

uip

ENTER

[ NET/

DTU]

(Main remote control unit)

(Sub remote control unit)

[REPEAT]

[RANDOM]

[USB]

Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices

Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the AVR-3808.

Basic Operation

Make the necessary preparations.

• Set the USB port to be used.

: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” –

“Playback Mode” – “USB Select” (vpage 40)

• Connect the USB memory device to the set USB port.

Use ui to select “USB”, then press ENTER or p.

Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press

ENTER or p.

A “ ” mark is indicated in front of music ﬁ les that can be

played.

Use ui to select the  le, then press ENTER or p.

Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

By default, the front panel’s USB port will be used.

Playing repeatedly

Press [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] All One OFF

: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” –

“Playback Mode” – “Repeat” (vpage 40)

Playing in random order

Press [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” –

“Playback Mode” – “Random” (vpage 40)

• If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the top partition can be selected.

• The AVR-3808 is compatible with MP3 ﬁ les conforming to “MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3” standards.

• If [USB] on the sub remote control unit is pressed when the USB memory device or folder is selected, all the tracks on the USB memory device or in the folder are played.

NOTE

• The AVR-3808 is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time. Select the USB port you want to use at the “Source Select” – “NET/ USB” – “Playback Mode” – “USB Select” menu.

• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB memory device connected to the AVR-3808.

• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.

• DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a USB connection type portable hard disk of the type for which power can be supplied by connecting an AC adapter, we recommend using the AC adapter.

• It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVR-3808’s USB port using a USB cable.

• The AVR-3808 is not compatible with the iPod shufﬂ e.

Selecting tracks

During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track).

Surround mode

Playback

INPUT MODE

[ AMP]

Surround mode

( mode)



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Operating the AVR-3808 Using a Browser (Web control)

This function lets you operate the AVR-3808 using Internet Explorer.

Check the AVR-3808’s IP address.

: “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” –

“Network Information” (vpage 33)

Input the AVR-3808’s IP address in Internet

Explorer.

The AVR-3808 can be operated in the same way as with regular Internet browsing.

To use the web control function, set the GUI menu “Manual Setup”– “Network Setup” – “Other” – “Power Saving” setting to “OFF” (vpage 33).

Other Operations and Functions

Other Operations

Playing Super Audio CD

At the “Digital” or “HDMI” setting (vpage 39),

select the input source for which “DENON LINK” or “HDMI” is assigned.

The “ ” or “ ” indicator lights on the display.

Use INPUT MODE to select “Auto” (vpage 38).

Select the input mode according to the program source to be played.

Select the surround mode (vpage 40, 41).

We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode.

Start playing the Super Audio CD.

The “ ” indicator lights on the display. For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s operating instructions.

• When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode, the DSD signals are converted as such into analog signals. When playing in other surround modes, the DSD signals are ﬁ rst converted into PCM format, then into analog signals.

• “DSD DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD 2-channel signals in the DIRECT mode. “DSD MULTI DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD multi--channel signals in the DIRECT mode.

Playback

Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

ZONE2 SOURCE ZONE2 TUNER ZONE2 NET/USB····

····RECOUT NET/USB RECOUT SOURCERECOUT TUNER

<POWER>

CH SELECT

uiop

QUICK SELECT

CH SELECT

uiop

QUICK SELECT

Playback

Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode)

You can listen to one program source while recording a different program source.

Press <ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT>.

“ZONE2 SOURCE” is shown on the display.

Turn <SOURCE SELECT> until “RECOUT SOURCE”

is displayed.

The “ ” indicator lights.

Turn <SOURCE SELECT> to choose the input source

to be recorded.

Play the program source.

For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s

operating instructions. To record FM or AM broadcasts, select the broadcast (vpage

48).

Start recording.

For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s

operating instructions.

• To cancel, press <ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT>

until “ZONE2 SOURCE” is displayed.

• Make a test recording before starting the actual recording.

• Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when the digital signals input to the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/ COAXIAL) are PCM (2-channel) signals.

• Digital audio signals input to the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors are not output to the REC OUT connectors, so connect using the OPTICAL or COAXIAL connectors.

• Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE2 as well.

• In the REC OUT mode, the remote control unit’s ZONE2 mode buttons cannot be operated.

• The network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) are not output if they are copyright-protected.

NOTE

• Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright holder.

• When “DENON LINK” is assigned at the GUI menu “Assign” setting, the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server and USB), input from the digital input connectors cannot be output from the analog REC OUT connectors.

• Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete” cannot be selected.



About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Convenient Functions

Channel Level

You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your taste, as described below.

Press CH SELECT.

Use ui or CH SELECT to select the speaker.

The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the

buttons is pressed.

Use o p to adjust the volume.

b “OFF” can be set by pressing o when the subwoofer’s volume is

set to –12 dB.

Fader Function

This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound from all the front or rear speakers at once.

Press CH SELECT.

Press ui or CH SELECT to select “Fader”.

Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers.

(o: front, p: rear)

• The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.

• The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted to the lowest value is –12 dB.

Quick Select Function

With this function, the currently playing input source, input mode, surround mode, room EQ settings and volume can be stored in the memory.

Set the input source, input mode, surround mode,

room EQ settings and volume to the conditions you want to store.

Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT.

Keep pressing the button until the quick select indicator lights.

[Quick Select Defaults]

Quick Select 1 DVD –40 dB Quick Select 2 TV/CBL –40 dB Quick Select 3 VCR –40 dB

• To call out the settings, press QUICK SELECT at which the desired

settings were stored.

• The Quick Select name can be changed (vpage 35).

NOTE

Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected if they have been deleted at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Source Delete” (vpage 34). In this case, store them again.

Input Source Volume

Personal Memory Plus Function

This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode, etc.) last selected for the individual input sources. When you switch to an input source, the settings are automatically set to the ones that were set the last time that input source was used.

The surround parameters, tone control, room EQ settings and the volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes.

Last Function Memory

This stores the settings as they were directly before the standby mode was set. When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored to as they were directly before the standby mode was set.

Backup Memory

The various settings are backed up for about 1 week, even if the power is turned off or the power cord is disconnected.

Resetting the Microprocessor

Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed. When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values.

Turn off the power using <POWER>.

Press <POWER> while simultaneously pressing

<STANDARD> and <DSP SIMULATION>.

Once the display starts ashing at intervals of about 1

second, release the two buttons.

If in step 3 the display does not ﬂash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1.

Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

[ AMP]

[NUMBER]

[HOME]

[MODE SELECTOR]

[RC SETUP]

Remote Control Unit Operations

Main Remote Control Unit

• On the main remote control unit, the display switches

according to the device being operated and the mode.

• In modes other than iPod, the mode switches between

“ ” and “ ” each time the [MODE SELECTOR] is pressed.

• In the AMP, TUNER, NET/DTU and iPod modes, when the

remote ID is set, the AVR-3808 can be used independently even in an environment containing multiple DENON

Remote Control

ampliﬁers.

Signal transmission indicator

Operating DENON Audio Components

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be

operated.

The indicator for the component to be operated ﬂashes.

: AMP / ZONE2 / ZONE3 /

ZONE4 / SYSTEM CALL

: TUNER (FM/AM)

: NETWORK/USB /

DIGITAL TUNER

: Satellite Receiver / Cable TV

b The TUNER ( ) and NET/DTU ( ) mode is not used

on the AVR-3808, so use the learn function to store the signals (vpage 63).

b The mode switches each time [AMP] is pressed.

AMP modeH GZONE2 modeH GZONE3 modeH

: iPod

: DVD player (Recorder) /

CD player (Recorder)

: VCR / TAPE

: TV

[HOME] is used to return to the AMP mode (AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL) when in any mode other than AMP.

Presetting

The included main remote control unit can be preset to operate devices of various brands.

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

preset.

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [NUMBER] and input the 5-digit number of the

brand of the component to be preset. The numbers are shown in the Preset Code Table (v End of this manual).

When the code is registered, the signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice. When the preset code is transmitted, the mode indicator for the component to which that code belongs ﬂashes.

b The input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10

seconds.

Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your equipment, some buttons may not operate.

NOTE

The device mode (“ ” or “ ”) cannot be changed while the setting is being made.

0

GSYSTEM CALL modeH GZONE4 modeH

Operate the component.

b For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.

Some brands have more than one preset code. If the component does not operate, try inputting a different code.

Operating Preset Components

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be

operated.

The mode indicator of the device to be operated ﬂashes.

Operate the component.

b For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.

[MENU]

[CH + /

SHUFFLE],

[CH – /

REPEAT]

[SETUP/

SEARCH]

[ENTER]

[RETURN]

[0 ~ 9, +10]

[uiop]

[1], [8 9], [6 7], [3], [2], [SOURCE ON], [SOURCE OFF]

[MODE

SELECTOR]

Functions of Buttons by Component

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

EL Display

Buttons

EL Display

MODE SELECTOR DVD VCR iPod

Device Mode

Device operated

8 9

6 7

3 2

SOURCE ON Power on Power on – – Power on – – SOURCE OFF Power off Power off – – Power off – –

MENU Menu/guide Menu/guide – – Menu/guide – Menu

u i o p

ENTER Enter setting Enter setting – – Enter setting – Enter

SETUP/SEARCH Set up Set up – – Set up –

RETURN Return Return – – Cancel – Return

CH + / SHUFFLE – – – – Switch channels –

CH - / REPEAT – – – – Switch channels –

0 ~ 9, +10 Select track Select track Select track Select track – – –

Special Remarks

GSpecial RemarksH

q Only one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared. w The names of the functions for the DVD remote control buttons differ from brand to brand. Check beforehand.

DVD

(Default setting)

Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback/Pause

Auto search

(cue)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/ fast-forward)

Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause –

Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop

Cursor Cursor – – Cursor – Cursor

DVD Recorder

Auto search

(cue)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

q, w q q q

(Default setting)

Auto search

(cue)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

CD Recorder VCR TAPE iPod

Auto search

(cue)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

Buttons

Auto search

(cue)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

Auto search

(cue)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/ fast-forward)

Auto search

(cue)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/ fast-forward)

Page forward

screen / Browse/

Remote mode

switching (Press

and hold)

1-track/album

shufﬂe play

1-track/All-track

repeat play

–

NOTE

• Preset a DVD player or DVD recorder for the “DVD” – “ ” mode. Preset a CD player or CD recorder for the “DVD” – “ ” mode.

• Preset a VCR for the “VCR” – “ ” mode. Preset a tape deck for the “VCR” – “ ” mode.

Remote Control



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

[MENU]

[CH +/–]

[TV/VCR]

[ENTER]

[DISPLAY]

[0 ~ 9, +10]

[uiop]

[SETUP]

[1], [8 9], [6 7], [3], [2], [SOURCE ON], [SOURCE OFF]

[MODE

SELECTOR]

[CH +/–]

[SEARCH]

[SHIFT]

[A ~ G], [d f], [BAND], [MODE], [MEMO]

[ENTER]

[1 ~ 8]

[uiop]

[MODE

SELECTOR]

EL Display

Remote Control

Buttons

EL Display

MODE SELECTOR TV Satellite Receiver / Cable TV

Device Mode

Device operated TV (HITACHI) TV (SONY) SAT SAT

8 9

6 7

3 2

SOURCE ON Power on Power on Power on Power on

SOURCE OFF Power off Power off Power off Power off

MENU Menu/guide Menu/guide Menu/guide Menu/guide

u i o p

ENTER Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting SETUP Set up Set up Set up Set up

DISPLAY Display Display Display Display

CH + / – Switch channels Switch channels Switch channels Switch channels

0 ~ 9, +10 Channel selection Channel selection Channel selection Channel selection

TV/VCR Switch inputs Switch inputs – –

Special Remarks

GSpecial RemarksH

q Only one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared. e The CD, VCR or DVD buttons (one only set) can be assigned to the monitor, satellite receiver and cable TV (vpage 64 “Punch Through

Function”).

Punch through Punch through Punch through Punch through

Buttons

Cursor Cursor Cursor Cursor

q, e q, e q, e q, e



Buttons

EL Display

MODE SELECTOR TU NET / DTU

Device Mode

Device operated Analog tuner NET / USB

A ~ G Preset memory block selection Preset memory block selection

d f

BAND AM/FM switching – MODE Switch search modes –

MEMO Preset memory registration Preset memory registration

u i o p

ENTER – Enter, Playback/Pause

SEARCH RDS search Search

CH + / – Preset channel selection Preset channel selection

1 ~ 8 Preset channel selection Preset channel selection

SHIFT Switch memory block Switch memory block

Tuning + / – –

Buttons

– Cursor

Setting the Remote ID

[ AMP]

[NUMBER]

[MODE SELECTOR]

[RC SETUP]

[ TU]

[ iPod]

[ NET/DTU]

When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room, make this setting so that only the desired AV receiver operates.

Press [AMP] to set the main remote control unit to the

AMP mode.

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Refer to the table at the right, and use [NUMBER] to

input the 5-digit number corresponding to the remote ID to be changed.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Signal transmission indicator

MODE SELECTOR

AMP

(MAIN)

Remote ID

(Default)

2 82001 52795 72816 62837

3 83001 52800 72817 62838

4 84001 52805 72818 62839

NOTE

• When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the

AVR-3808’s (vpage 35).

• When changing the AMP mode’s remote ID, also change the “TUNER”, “iPod” and “NET/DTU” remote ID at the same time.

• Set the remote ID of an analog tuner for “TUNER” – “ ”.

81001 52863 72815 62865

TUNER

(Analog

TUNER)

NET/DTU

iPod

(Net Audio /

USB)

Learning Function

If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if they cannot be operated with the preset memory function, their remote control signals can be transfered to stored in the AVR-3808’s main remote control unit.

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

set.

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [9], [7] and [5], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the learning

mode is set.

Press the button to be set.

The main remote control unit’s display turns off.

b If a button that cannot be learned is pressed, the signal transmission

indicator lights but the signal is not learned.

Point the main remote control units directly at each

other and press and hold the button on the other device’s remote control unit that you want to learn.

Once learning is completed normally, the display lights and the signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Other device’s remote control unit

AVR-3808’s main remote control unit (RC-1068)

b If you want to learn other buttons, repeat steps 4 and 5. b The mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR]. b The signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if

learning was not possible

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the setting

is completed.

• With some remote control units, the signals cannot be learned or the device will not operate properly even when the signals have been learned. In this case, use the device’s own remote control unit.

• Learned buttons have priority over the preset memory. If you no longer need the learned setting, reset the learning function (vpage

65).

NOTE

• [HOME] cannot be learned.

• Do not learn any remote control signals at [RC SETUP].

• The AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes cannot be learned.

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Remote Control

Press [TU], [iPod] or [NET/DTU] to select the mode to

be set.

Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all

modes.



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

[NUMBER]

[RC SETUP]

[MODE

SELECTOR]

[ AMP]

[POWER

ON]

[SYSTEM

CALL]

[CHANNEL

+/–]

[8], [9], [6], [7], [1], [3], [2]

Remote Control

Signal

transmission

indicator

System Call Function

This function lets you register a series of operations at a single button. For example, the ampliﬁer can be turned on, the input source selected, the monitor’s power turned on, the source device’s power turned on and the play mode set all by pressing a single button. Up to 32 signals each can be registered at [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3).

Registering

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the system

call registration mode is set.

Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which you want to

Press the buttons you want to register in the same

sequence as the operations you want to perform.

The signal transmission indicator lights when a button is pressed.

Example : Press [POWER ON]. ↓ Press [MODE SELECTOR] – [DVD]. ↓

Press [1]. b The mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR]. b Perform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the setting

is completed.

Calling out

Press [AMP], to select “SYSTEM CALL”.

Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which the signals

were registered.

The registered signals are transmitted in the registered

sequence.

Punch Through Function

CD, DVD or VCR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV or SAT/CBL mode buttons. For example, when DVD mode buttons are assigned to the TV mode, the DVD mode operations can be performed while in the TV mode.

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

punch through (CD, DVD or VCR).

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the punch

through setting mode is set.

Press the button you want to punch through (1, 2,

6, 7, 8, 9 or 3).

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

punch through (TV or SAT/CBL).

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the setting

is completed.



Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [9], [7] and [3], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the backlight

on time setting mode is set.

Set the light on time.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

[Settable times] : [1] : 5 sec. [2] : 10 sec. (Default) [3] : 15 sec. [4] : 20 sec. [5] : 25 sec.

Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness

The display’s brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps. (Default: Step 3)

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [CHANNEL +] or [CHANNEL –].

The display gets one step brighter when [+] is pressed.

The display gets one step darker when [–] is pressed.

Press [RC SETUP] to complete the setting.

Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit

Learning Function

GResetting button by buttonH

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

reset.

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press the button you want to reset twice.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

GResetting by device modeH

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

reset.

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

reset twice.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

System Call Function

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) you want to reset.

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Punch Through Function

Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

reset (TV or SAT/CBL).

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

All Settings

Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Remote Control

Press [9], [8] and [1], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes 4 times.

All the settings are restored to their defaults.



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

[8 9], [2], [1/3], [TUNING d f]

[RANDOM]

[USB]

[REPEAT]

[RETURN]

[ZONE SELECT] [ZONE ON]

[ZONE OFF]

[SOURCE SELECT]

[SEARCH]

[MUTE]

[uiop]

[MENU]

[CHANNEL +/–]

[VOLUME +/–] [SHIFT]

[ENTER]

[ALL MUSIC], [FAVORITES]

Sub Remote Control Unit Operations

• The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently used buttons, so it can be used for simple remote control unit operations.

• The sub remote control unit can also be used for multi-zone, so you can use it to control the AVR-3808 from other rooms.

• The operations listed below can be performed with the sub remote control unit.

• It is not possible to operate devices other than the ampliﬁer.

Remote Control

•

Switching the input source

•

Adjusting the volume

•

Tuner (AM/FM) and iPod operations

•

NET/USB direct play

•

GUI menu and ZONE2 on-screen display operations

•

Zone power on/off

Functions of Buttons by Component

Device operated

Zone selection M Z2 Z3 M Z2 Z3

ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection

ZONE OFF

ZONE ON

SOURCE SELECT

CHANNEL + / – – Preset channel selection

SHIFT –

VOLUME + / –

MUTE MENU Selected zone menu Selected zone menu

SEARCH – RDS search

8 9,

TUNING d f

USB

ALL MUSIC *

(Music server only)

FAVORITES *

b1: Affects the currently selected zone. b2: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the ﬁles on the USB memory device are played. b3: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the ﬁles in “All Music” on the music server are played. b4: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the ﬁles in “Favorites” are played.

*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 40).

DVD, HDP, TV / CBL, DVR1, VCR, V.AUX,

SAT, CD, PHONO

Power turned off (b1) Power turned off (b1) Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1)

Input source selection (b2)

Preset channel memory block

Adjustment of volume (b1) Adjustment of volume (b1)

Muting (b1) Muting (b1)

– Tuning

TUNER

(AM/FM)

Input source selection

selection



DIRECT PLAY button

• Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” – “Direct Play”.

FAVORITES: Playback starts from the ﬁrst track registered in the favorites. ALL MUSIC: Playback starts from the ﬁrst track registered in the “All Music” folder.

• When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the ﬁrst track on the USB memory device.

NOTE

When the music server is stopped or restarted, it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites.

Device operated NET / USB iPod

Zone selection M Z2 Z3 M Z2 Z3

ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection

ZONE OFF ZONE ON

SOURCE SELECT

CHANNEL + / – Preset channel selection –

SHIFT

VOLUME + / –

MUTE

MENU Selected zone menu Selected zone menu

u i o p

ENTER File operations – File operations –

RETURN File operations – –

8 9,

TUNING d f

1/3

REPEAT 1-track/All-track repeat play (USB) 1-track/All-track repeat play

RANDOM 1-track random play (USB) 1-track/album shufﬂe play

USB

ALL MUSIC *

(Music server only)

FAVORITES *

*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 40).

Power turned off (b1) Power turned off (b1) Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1)

Input source selection (b2)

Preset channel memory block

selection

Adjustment of volume (b1) Adjustment of volume (b1)

Muting (b1) Muting (b1)

File operations – File operations –

Page forward screen /

Character search

Track search Track search

Stop Stop

Play/pause Play/pause

–

Input source selection

–

Page forward screen /

Browse/Remote mode

switching (press and hold)

–

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Remote Control



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

[REPEAT]

[RANDOM]

[MENU]

[ZONE OFF]

[USB] [ALL MUSIC/

FAVORITES]

[ZONE SELECT] [ADVANCED SETUP]

Multi-zone indicator

Remote Control

Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK mode)

We recommend always using the sub remote control unit for the same room. When this is done, the unit can be set so that the zone does not switch when buttons are operated.

Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].

All the multi-zone indicators light.

Select the multi-zone to be set.

The selected multi-zone indicator lights.

q To set to main zone : Press [REPEAT]. w To set to ZONE2 : Press [RANDOM]. e To set to ZONE3 : Press [USB].

Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].

The multi-zone indicator turns off.

Setting the Remote ID

When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room, make this setting so that no AV receiver other than the desired one operates.

While pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP]

with the tip of a pen.

The multi-zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected remote ID ﬂashes.

Select the remote ID to be set.

q To set to 1 : Press [REPEAT]. The “M” indicator ﬂashes.

w To set to 2 : Press [RANDOM]. The “Z2” indicator ﬂashes. e To set to 3 : Press [USB]. The “Z3” indicator ﬂashes. r To set to 4 : Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES]. The “Z4” indicator ﬂashes.

Switching Zones

Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by the sub remote control unit.

Press [ZONE SELECT].

The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.

While the multi-zone indicator is light, press [ZONE

SELECT] to select the zone to be operated.

The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.



To Cancel

Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].

The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.

Press [ZONE SELECT].

All the multi-zone indicators light.

Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].

The multi-zone indicator turns off.

While pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP]

with the tip of a pen.

The multi-zone indicator turns off.

NOTE

When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVR-3808’s (vpage 35).

Resetting the Settings

While pressing [ZONE OFF], press [ADVANCED SETUP] with the tip of a pen.

All the multi-zone indicators ﬂash 4 times, then all the settings are restored to their defaults.

Amp Assign / Multi-Zone Connections and

SBL SBR

SW C FR

Operations

Setting 1 :

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Information Troubleshooting

F 7.1-channel playback

Main zone

The AVR-3808 is compatible with the following types of playback:

• Multi-zone playback (ZONE2 & ZONE3)

• Bi-amp playback (front speaker)

NOTE

• For bi-amp playback, use speakers compatible with that type of connection.

• When conducting bi-amp playback, remove the short-circuiting boards (or wires) from the speaker terminals.

Multi-Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function

The amp assign function lets you assign the ampliﬁers for the different channels built into the AVR-3808 to the speaker outputs for the different zones. Select the desired playback environment from among “Setting 1” to “Setting 4”, then set the corresponding “Amp Assign” mode at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Amp Assign” (vpage 34). Connect the speakers as described at “Amp Assign mode settings and speakers connected to the various speaker terminals”.

“Setting 3” is possible to switch the Amp Assign mode between the 5.1-channel mode and 2-channel mode without changing the speaker connections.

7.1ch

Amp Assign mode:

7CH

(Default)

Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.

n Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker

terminals

Speaker terminal

Amp Assign mode

7.1CH FR FL C SR-A SL-A SR-B SL-B SBR SBL

FRONT

R L R L R L R L

CENTER

SURR-A SURR-B

SURR. BACK /

AMP ASSIGN

Multi-Zone



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Information Troubleshooting

C FR

L R

C FR

L R

Z2L Z2R

SW C FR

Z3L Z3R

Setting 2 :

F Multi-zone playback

• 5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 or ZONE3 stereo playback

• 5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 or ZONE3 monaural playback

Main zone

5.1ch

ZONE2

Stereo

Mono

• “STEREO” or “MONO” depends on the setting at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “Channel” (vpage 33).

• Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.

n Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker

Multi-Zone

terminals

Speaker terminal

Amp Assign mode

FRONT

R L R L R L R L

ZONE2

ZONE3 Z3R Z3L

FR FL C SR-A SL-A SR-B SL-B

ZONE (MONO)

ZONE3

CENTER

Stereo

Mono

Amp Assign mode:

ZONE2

ZONE3

ZONE (MONO)

SURR-A SURR-B

(MONO)

SURR. BACK /

AMP ASSIGN

Z2R Z2L

(MONO)

Setting 3 : With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes.

F 5.1-channel playback F 2-channel playback

Switching ················Surround Mode switching

Main zone

Surround Mode

5.1ch

DIRECT / STEREO

Multi Channel /

Surround

Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.

n Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker

terminals

Speaker terminal

Amp Assign mode

2CH FR FL C SR-A SL-A SR-B SL-B FR FL

FRONT

CENTER

R L R L R L R L

Main zone

Amp Assign mode:

2ch

2CH

SURR-A SURR-B

SURR. BACK /

AMP ASSIGN

0

'- 48 '3

Setting 4 :

SW C FR

F Making bi-amp connections for the FL and FR channels in the main zone

and conducting 5.1-channel playback

(switching with other modes not possible)

Main zone

5.1ch

FL/FR

Bi-Amp

Amp Assign mode:

Bi-Amp

Multi-Zone Settings and Operations with Zone Pre-out

Remote control unit

Output

Prepare power ampliﬁers for ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Connectors for audio output Audio signals Connectors for video output

ZONE2 ZONE2 PRE OUT Stereo ZONE2 VIDEO OUT

ZONE3 ZONE3 PRE OUT Stereo –

Main zone (7.1-channel system)

Monitor

ZONE2

Monitor

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Information Troubleshooting

Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.

n Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker

terminals

Speaker terminal

Amp Assign mode

FRONT

R L R L R L R L

Bi-Amp FR FL C SR-A SL-A SR-B SL-B

CENTER

SURR-A SURR-B

SURR. BACK /

AMP ASSIGN

FR FL

FL/FR Bi-Amp

connection

Power ampliﬁer

DVD player

AVR-3808

Input

ZONE2 video output

ZONE2 audio output

ZONE3

Remote control unit

ZONE3 audio output

Power ampliﬁer

: Multi-zone video cable : Multi-zone audio cable

• When only using one speaker for ZONE2 or ZONE3, set to “Mono”. In this case, the ZONE2 (ZONE3) monaural output is output from the ZONE2 (ZONE3) pre-out L and R connectors, so connect as desired.

• Separate power ampliﬁers are needed for ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Multi-Zone



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Information Troubleshooting

[MUTE]

SOURCE

SELECT

[ON]

[OFF]

VOLUME

[ AMP]

[ON]

[OFF]

SOURCE SELECT

[ZONE SELECT]

[ON] [OFF]

SOURCE SELECT <ZONE3 ON/OFF>

VOLUME

ZONE2 MENU

INPUT :DVD SIGNAL:ANALOG VOL. :-40dB

>Bass 0dB

HPF OFF

Treble 0dB

Lch Lev. 0dB Rch Lev. 0dB

ZONE2 MENU

>Channel STEREO Vol.Lev. VAR

P.On Lev. LAST

Vol.Limit OFF

Mute Lev. FULL

Multi-Zone Operations

Turning the Power On and Off

GOperation on the main unitH

Press <ZONE2 ON/OFF> or <ZONE3 ON/OFF> for the zone to be operated. When the power turns on, the multi-zone indicator lights on the display.

Turning off the Sound Temporarily

In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound, press [MUTE]. The sound is reduced to the level set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Mute Level” (vpage 33). To cancel, either adjust the volume or press [MUTE] again. The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off.

Multi-Zone

(Main remote control unit)

GOperation on the remote control unitH

In the zone mode you want to operate, press [ON] or [OFF].

Selecting the Input Source

GOperation on the main unitH

q Press <ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted. w Turn <SOURCE SELECT>.

GOperation on the remote control unitH

In the zone mode you want to operate, press [SOURCE SELECT].

Adjusting the Volume

GOperation on the main unitH

q Press <ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted. w Turn <VOLUME> to adjust.

GOperation on the remote control unitH

In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust, press [VOLUME].

– – – –70dB

The volume can be adjusted when GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. The volume can be increased up to the value set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Volume Limit” (vpage 33).

–40dB

+18dB[Variable range]

• The source selected for ZONE2 is also output from the recording output connectors.

• For ZONE2, the “Zone Setup” can be made while watching the onscreen display. Also, when ZONE3 is operated, the on-screen display appears on the ZONE2 monitor, so operation can be performed watching this on-screen display.

NOTE

• When the input source to which the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected in ZONE2 or ZONE3, playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM (2-channel) format.

• Digital audio signals input from the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors cannot be played in multi-zone.

• When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors.



About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

(Sub remote control unit)

'- $

43DI4-DI

'- $

4-DI 43DI

4#DI

Other Information

About Speaker Installation

Surround back speakers

Number of surround back speakers

We recommend using 2 speakers. When using dipolar speakers in particular, be sure to use 2 speakers.

Placement of the surround left and right channels when using surround back speakers

We recommend installing the speakers for the surround “L” and “R” channels a bit forward.

w Setting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type

speakers for the surround speakers

For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment, diffuse radiation speakers such as bipolar types, or dipolar types, provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct radiating speaker (monopolar). Place these speakers at either side of the prime listening position, mounted above ear level.

Path of the surround sound from the speakers to the listening position

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting

Sound positioning directly to the rear can be achieved easily by adding a surround back speaker to a 5.1-channel system. In addition, the acoustic image extending between the sides and the rear is narrowed, thus greatly improving the expression of the surround signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the listening position.

Change of positioning and acoustic image

with 5.1-channel systems

Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL

Change of positioning and acoustic image

with 6.1-channel systems

Examples of speaker layouts

Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts. Refer to these to arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to use them.

G1H Using surround back speaker(s)

q When mainly playing movies

Recommended when your surround speakers are single or 2-way speakers.

Front speakers

Center speaker

Monitor

Subwoofer

60°

Surround speakers

60°

Surround back speakers

As seen from above

Front speaker

H G

Surround speaker

As seen from the side

Surround back

60 to 90 cm

speaker

Point slightly downwards

Surround speakers

Front speaker

60°

Surround back speakers

As seen from above

H G

e When playing movies and music

Front speakers

Center speaker

Monitor

Subwoofer

45° ~ 60°

Surround speaker A

120°

Surround back

speaker

Surround speaker B

As seen from above

H G

Surround speaker A

Front speaker

Surround speaker

As seen from the side

Surround back

speaker

60 to 90 cm

Surround back

speaker

60 to 90 cm

Point slightly downwards

Surround speaker B

Information

In addition to sources recorded in 6.1-channels, the surround effect of conventional 2- to 5.1-channel sources can also be enhanced.

Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting

G2H When not using surround back speakers

Front speakers Center speaker

Monitor

Subwoofer

60°

Surround speaker

Front speaker

60 to 90 cm

120°

Surround speakers

As seen from above

H G

As seen from the side

Surround

The AVR-3808 is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.

Information

Dolby Surround

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories. A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL” , “FR” and “C”), 2 surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low frequencies. Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound ﬁeld with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved. A real, overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater ﬂexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback equipment.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is a high deﬁnition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master. This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96 kHz and up to 7.1-channels, so it is used for applications particularly prioritizing sound quality.

Dolby Pro Logic g

Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories. Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5-channels to achieve an excellent surround effect. The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater)

to create a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich sense of presence for all stereo sources.

DTS Surround

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-HD Master Audio

Dolby Pro Logic gx

Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic g matrix decoding technology.

Audio signals recorded in 2-channels are decoded to achieve a natural sound with up to 7.1-channels. There are 3 modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and “Game” which is optimized for playing games.

b Sources recorded in Dolby Surround

Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the following logo marks. Dolby Surround support mark :

DTS-HD Master Audio is DTS, Inc’s lossless audio format compatible with up to 96 kHz/7.1-channels. The lossless audio coding technology faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format inserting a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS NEO:6™ Surround

DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6.1channel surround playback with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS NEO:6 CINEMA” suited for playing movies and “DTS NEO:6 MUSIC” suited for playing music.



DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc.© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Audyssey MultEQ® XT

Audyssey MultEQ® XT is a technology designed to provide the optimum listening environment for multiple listeners within the listening area. Test data collected from multiple listening points is analyzed comprehensively and equalization that improves the sound quality for the entire listening area is performed. Audyssey MultEQ not only corrects frequency response problem in a large listening area, it also performs a fully automated surround system setup. For a detailed description, see page 25.

Audyssey MultEQ® XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. It is licensed under US and National Patent Applications 20030235318 and 10/700,220. Additional U.S. and Foreign Patents pending. MultEQ XT and the Audyssey MultEQ XT logo are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.. All rights reserved.

HDCD

(High Deﬁnition Compatible Digital®)

HDCD® is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining compatibility with the conventional CD format, thus expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution. Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identiﬁed automatically to select the optimum digital processing.

, HDCD®, High Deﬁnition Compatible Digital® and Microsoft® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. HDCD system manufactured under license from Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or more of the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074, 5,640,161, 5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311, 5,872,531, and in Australia: 669114. Other patents pending.

DENON LINK

DENON LINK is a unique digital, balanced transfer type interface developed by DENON. It offers high speed, high quality transfer of digital audio data with low signal loss. It can be used together with DENON DVD players equipped with a special DENON LINK connector using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality. It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz/24 bit 2-channel digital signals of DVD-Audio discs, PCM multi-channel signals, etc. Full-spec digital transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CD is possible by connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition.

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting

AL24 Processing Plus

AL24 Processing for All Channels

DENON has further developed its proprietary AL24 Processing, an analog waveform reproduction technology, to support the 192 kHz sampling frequency of DVD-Audio. AL24 Processing Plus, thoroughly suppresses quantization noise associated with D/A conversion of LPCM signals to reproduce the low-level signals with optimum clarity that will bring out all the delicate nuances of the music. Equipped foe not only front left and right channels but also for the surround left and right, center and subwoofer channels.

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting

HDMI (High-Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface)

HDMI is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs based on DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standards and optimized for use in consumer equipment. Non-compressed digital video and multi-channel audio signals are transmitted with a single connection. HDMI is also compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents Protection), a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital video signals in the same was as with DVI.

Deep Color

Eliminates on-screen color banding, for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. Enables increased contrast ratio. Can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. At 30-bit pixel depth, a four times improvement would be the minimum, and the typical improvement would be eight times or more.

xvYCC

Next-generation “xvYCC” color space supports 1.8 times as many colors as existing HDTV signals. Lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. Enables displays with natural, vivid colors.

Information

Lip Sync

Because consumer electronics devices are using increasingly complex digital signal processing to enhance the clarity and detail of the content, synchronization of video and audio in user devices has become a greater challenge and could potentially require complex enduser adjustments. HDMI 1.3 incorporates an automatic video/audio synching capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically with total accuracy.

“HDMI”, “HDMI logo” and “High-Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

Surround Modes and Parameters

Signals and adjustability in the different modes

Surround Mode

Front L/R Center

PURE DIRECT, DIRECT

DSD DIRECT

DSD MULTI DIRECT

MULTI CH DIRECT

STEREO

EXT. IN

MULTI CH IN

WIDE SCREEN DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S D D D D S (OFF) A A S S (NOTE1) DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S D D A D S (OFF) A A S S (NOTE2)

DTS NEO:6

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS SURROUND

7CH STEREO

SUPER STADIUM

ROCK ARENA

JAZZ CLUB

CLASSIC CONCERT

MONO MOVIE

VIDEO GAME

MATRIX

VIRTURL

S A A A D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A A A S A A A A A A A A A S D D D D A S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D A S ( 0 dB) S (ON) S A S A A A D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A A A S D D D D A A A A A S D D D D A S ( 0 dB) S (ON) S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S S (OFF)

S D D D D S (OFF) A A S S (NOTE1) S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S A A A D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A A A

S : Signal / Adjustable A : No signal / Not adjustable D : Turned on or off by speaker conﬁguration setting

Channel output Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)

Surround

L/R

Surround

Back L/R

Subwoofer

D. COMP

S : Enable A : Unable

NOTE1 : This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter”

NOTE2 : This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter”

NOTE:

1 : When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

2 : When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio and Super

LFE

– “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to “Cinema” (vpage 42).

– “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to “Cinema” or “Pro Logic” (vpage 42).

Audio CD.

AFDM

SB CH Out Cinema EQ.



Signals and adjustability in the different modes

Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)

Surround Mode

Mode Room Size Effect Level Delay Time Subwoofer

PURE DIRECT, DIRECT

DSD DIRECT

DSD MULTI DIRECT

MULTI CH DIRECT

STEREO

EXT. IN

MULTI CH IN

WIDE SCREEN DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S (Cinema) A A A A S (OFF) S (3) S (3) A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S (Cinema) A A A A S (OFF) S (3) S (3) A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

DTS NEO:6

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS SURROUND

7CH STEREO

SUPER STADIUM

ROCK ARENA

JAZZ CLUB

CLASSIC CONCERT

MONO MOVIE

VIDEO GAME

MATRIX

VIRTURL

A A A A S A A A A A A S (OFF) S (NOTE5) S A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (NOTE5) A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) A A A S (ON, 10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

S (Cinema) A A A A A A A S (0.3) A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (NOTE3) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (NOTE4) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A A A S (30 ms) A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

S : Signal / Adjustable A : No signal / Not adjustable D : Turned on or off by speaker conﬁguration setting

PRO LOGIC g/gx MUSIC mode only

Panorama Dimension Center Width Center Image Subwoofer Att.

S : Adjustable A : Not adjustable

NOTE3 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB NOTE4 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE +4 dB NOTE5 : Can be used according to the “Direct Mode” setting.

NEO:6 MUSIC

mode only

EXT. IN only

Tone Night Mode Room EQ RESTORER

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting

Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals

Information

STANDARD

DTS SURROUND

DTS ES DSCRT6.1

DTS ES MTRX6.1

DTS SURROUND

DTS 96/24 DTS + PLgx CINEMA DTS + PLgx MUSIC

DTS + NEO:6

DTS NEO:6 CINEMA

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

DOLBY SURROUND

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx CINEMA DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx MUSIC DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx CINEMA S S S A A A A A A A A F A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY PRO LOGIC

MULTI CH IN

MULTI CH IN MULTI IN + PLgx CINEMA MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC

MULTI CH IN 7.1

Button

Surround Mode

Note

ANALOG

LINEAR

PCM /

WAV

WMA

(Windows

Media Audio)

/ MP3 /

MPEG-4

DTS ES

DSCRT

(With Flag)

DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DVD-AUDIO Super Audio CD

DTS ES

MTRX

(With Flag)

DTS

(5.1ch)

DTS

96/24

AAC / FLAC

A A A F D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S S F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A

A A A S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S S S A A A A A A A A A S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S

A A A A A A A S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S F F F A A A A A

A A A A A A A F D S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S S S S A A A A A

S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S

A A A A A A A A A A A A F A F A

A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A

NOTE:

1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”.

2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”.

F : Mode selectable in initial status D : Mode ﬁxed when “AFDM” is “ON” S : Selectable mode A : Non-selectable mode

Input signals

DOLBY

DIGITAL EX

(With Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL EX

(With no

Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(5.1/5/4ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(4/3ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(2ch)

DVD-

Audio

(multi ch)

DVD-

Audio

(2ch)

DSD

(multi ch)

DSD (2ch)



Button

Surround Mode

DIRECT

DSD DIRECT

DSD MULTI DIRECT

MULTI CH DIRECT M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC

M DIRECT 7.1

PURE DIRECT

DSD PURE DIRECT

DSD MULTI PURE

MULTI CH PURE DIRECT M PURE D + PLgx CINEMA M PURE D + PLgx MUSIC

M CH PURE DIRECT 7.1

DSP SIMULATION

7CH STEREO

WIDE SCREEN

SUPER STADIUM

ROCK ARENA

JAZZ CLUB

CLASSIC CONCERT

MONO MOVIE

VIDEO GAME

MATRIX

VIRTUAL

STEREO

Note

ANALOG

LINEAR

PCM /

WAV

WMA

(Windows

Media Audio)

/ MP3 /

MPEG-4

DTS ES

DSCRT

(With Flag)

DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DVD-AUDIO Super Audio CD

DTS ES

MTRX

(With Flag)

DTS

(5.1ch)

DTS

96/24

AAC / FLAC

S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A

S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

F F F S S S S S S S S S S F S F

NOTE :

1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”.

2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”.

3: If the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”, then “5CH STEREO” is displayed.

F : Mode selectable in initial status S : Selectable mode A : Non-selectable mode

Input signals

DOLBY

DIGITAL EX

(With Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL EX

(With no

Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(5.1/5/4ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(4/3ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(2ch)

DVDAudio (multi

ch)

DVD-

Audio

(2ch)

DSD

(multi

ch)

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting

DSD (2ch)

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting

About Networks

Windows Media Player ver.11

This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation. It can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player ver. 11 as well as ﬁles in such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3 and WAV.

vTuner

This is a free online contents server for Internet radio. Note that usage fees are included in upgrade costs. For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below. vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.

Windows Media DRM

A copyright-protected technology developed by Microsoft.

• Windows Vista and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

• The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WMDRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.

Information

DLNA

• DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.

• Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED™ products.

0

Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output

n Main zone

Video Convert

With HDMI

Without HDMI

with HDMI monitor off

monitor

HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO

A A A A b A A A S A A S A A A S S A S (1080p) A A A A S (480p ~ 720p) A A A S (480i/576i) A A A S (1080p) A S A S (480p ~ 720p) A S A S (480i/576i) A S A S (1080p) S A A S (480p ~ 720p) S A A S (480i/576i) S A A S (1080p) S S A S (480p ~ 720p) S S A S (480i/576i) S S S A A A S A A S S A S A S A S S S S (1080p) A A S S (480p ~ 720p) A A S S (480i/576i) A A S S (1080p) A S S S (480p ~ 720p) A S S S (480i/576i) A S S S (1080p) S A S S (480p ~ 720p) S A S S (480i/576i) S A S S (1080p) S S S S (480p ~ 720p) S S S S (480i/576i) S S S A A A A A S A A S A S A S A A S A S S A S S (1080p) A A A S S (480p ~ 720p) A A A S S (480i/576i) A A A S S (1080p) A S A S S (480p ~ 720p) A S A S S (480i/576i) A S A S S (1080p) S A A S S (480p ~ 720p) S A A S S (480i/576i) S A A S S (1080p) S S A S S (480p ~ 720p) S S A S S (480i/576i) S S A

S : Signal present A : No signal

480p ~ 720p : 480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p

Input signal Monitor output Monitor output (when GUI menu displayed)

b b b

b b b b b b b b b b b

A : No output

VIDEO

S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

COMPONENT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT COMPONENT S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPONENT S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPONENT

z z

HDMI HDMI VIDEO VIDEO z4 VIDEO z4 HDMIz2 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO HDMI S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT HDMI COMPONENT HDMI COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO z4 VIDEO z4 HDMIz2 COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT HDMI COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT

1 : The “Picture Adjust” setting can be made. 2 : Superimposed over video signal 3 : Only displayed when the MENU button is

pressed

4 : If the input signal is in SECAM format, it is

VIDEOz1 VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1

COMPONENT

COMPONENTz1

COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1

COMPONENT VIDEO z4 VIDEO z4

COMPONENTz1

COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1

COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1

COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1

VIDEOz1 VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1

COMPONENT COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1

COMPONENT VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEO z4 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1

COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEO COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1

converted to PAL for output

A A A A

VIDEO

A A A

A A A A

A A A A A A

VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT

VIDEO

b : Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “A to H” is set) (vpage 30).

: Wallpaper or set background color displayed : Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “H to H” is set) (vpage 30). : GUI menu not displayed

b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

VIDEO

S-VIDEO S-VIDEO z3 COMPONENT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT COMPONENT S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPONENT S-VIDEO*2 COMPONENT COMPONENT

COMPONENTz2

COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2

COMPONENTz2

COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2

COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2

COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2

HDMIz2

HDMIz2 COMPONENT HDMIz2 COMPONENT

A A A

COMPONENTz2

A A A A A A A A A A

COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2

COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2

COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2

VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2

VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2

A A

VIDEO

S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2

A A A

A A A A

VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2

VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2

A A

VIDEO

S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting

Information

• The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4,43, PAL -N, PAL -M and PAL -60.

• When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video connector.

• If the input signal is a component 1080p signal, up-converting to HDMI is not possible.

• The GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting

Video Convert

OFF

HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO

A A A A A A A A S S S S A A A S A A A S (VIDEO) S S S S A A S A A A S (S-VIDEO) A S S S S A A S S A A S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S S S S A S A A A S (COMPONENT) A A S S S S A S A S A S (COMPONENT) A S (VIDEO) S S S S A S S A A S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) A S S S S

A S S S A S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S S S S S A A A S (HDMI) A A A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S A A S S (HDMI) A A S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A S A S A S (HDMI) A S (S-VIDEO) A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S A S S S (HDMI) A S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S A A S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) A A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S A S S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) A S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S S A S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S S S S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A

S : Signal present A : No signal

SIGNAL IN MONITOR OUT (Normally) MONITOR OUT (when GUI menu displayed)

To display the GUI menu on an HDMI monitor, output with a resolution of 480p/576p.

n ZONE2

Information

Input

S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO

A A A

A S S (VIDEO) S A S (S-VIDEO) S S S (S-VIDEO)

S : Signal present A : No signal

S : Output present A : No output

MONITOR OUT

S : Output present A : No output

2 : Superimposed over video signal



Troubleshooting

If a problem should arise, ﬁrst check the following:

1. Are the connections correct?

2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?

3. Are the other components operating properly?

If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist, there may be a malfunction. In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.

GGeneralH

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

Power does not turn on, or turns off directly after it was turned on.

No sound is produced from speakers.

Display is off. • The “Dimmer” setting is set to

“DOLBY DIGITAL” indicator does not appear on display.

• Connection of the power cord is faulty.

• Connection with the input devices or connection of the speaker cables is faulty.

• Device you want to play and set input source do not match.

• Master volume is turned too low.

• Mute mode is set.

• Headphones are connected.

• No digital signals are being input.

• The connectors to which the digital inputs are assigned and the settable input modes do not match.

“OFF”.

• The PURE DIRECT mode is set.

• DVD player’s digital audio output setting is not proper.

• Check that the power plugs are securely inserted into the AVR3808’s AC inlet and the wall power outlet.

• Check the connections.

• Select an appropriate input source.

• Adjust the master volume to an appropriate level.

• Cancel the mute mode.

• Disconnect the headphones.

• Select an input source for which the digital input setting has been made.

• Set the input mode.

• Set to something other than “OFF”.

• Set a surround mode other than the PURE DIRECT mode.

• Check the DVD player’s audio output setting. For details, read the DVD player’s operating instructions.

47 47 39

40, 41

–

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

Power turns off suddenly and power indicator ﬂashes red.

GRemote Control UnitH

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

Set does not work properly when remote control unit operated.

• Protection circuit activated due to rise of internal temperature.

• Core wires of two speakers are touching each other or a core wire is sticking out of the terminal and touching the set’s rear panel, activating the protection circuit.

• Speakers with an impedance other than speciﬁed are being used.

• Set is damaged.

• Batteries are worn.

• You are operating outside of the speciﬁed range.

• Obstacle between main unit and remote control unit.

• The batteries are not inserted in the proper direction, as indicated by the polarity marks in the battery compartment.

• The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type ﬂuorescent bulb light, etc.).

• The remote ID of the main unit and remote control unit do not match.

• Turn off the power, wait for the set to fully cool down, then turn the power back on.

• Place the set in a well-ventilated place.

• First unplug the power cord, then twist the core wires tightly or terminate the speaker cables, then reconnect.

• Use speakers with the speciﬁed impedance.

• Turn off the power and contact a DENON service center.

• Replace with new batteries.

• Operate within the speciﬁed range.

• Remove the obstacle.

• Insert the batteries in the proper direction, following the polarity marks in the battery compartment.

• Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.

• Set the same remote IDs for the main unit and remote control unit.

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information

–

3 3

Troubleshooting

35, 63



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information

GAudioH

No sound is produced from center speaker.

No sound is produced from surround speakers.

No sound is produced from surround back speaker.

No sound is produced from subwoofer.

No test tones are produced when main remote control unit’s TEST TONE button is

Troubleshooting

pressed. DTS sound is not

output.

HDMI audio signals are not output from speakers.

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

• You are playing a monaural source (TV, AM radio broadcast, etc.) in the STANDARD mode.

• The surround mode is set to “STEREO”, “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT”.

• The surround back speaker’s power ampliﬁer is assigned to a different channel.

• Surround back speaker setting is set to “None”.

• Surround mode not set to a mode for 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback.

• Subwoofer’s power not turned on.

• The “Subwoofer” setting at “Speaker conﬁguration” is set to “No”.

• The subwoofer is not properly connected.

• The subwoofer’s volume is turned off.

• Surround mode not set to “STANDARD”.

• DVD player’s audio output setting is not set to bitstream.

• DVD player is not compatible with DTS sound playback.

• The AVR-3808’s “Decode Mode” setting is set to “PCM”.

• The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to “TV”.

• The mode is set to something other than “STANDARD”.

• Set to a surround playback mode.

• Check the setting and change it as necessary.

• Set to something other than “None”.

• Select a surround playback mode.

• Turn on the subwoofer’s power.

• Set to “Yes”.

• Check the connections.

• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume to an appropriate level.

• Set to the STANDARD mode. 40

• Set the DVD player. For details, refer to the DVD player’s operating instructions.

• Use a DTS-compatible player.

• Set to the “Auto” or DTS mode.

• Set to “Amp”. 30

40, 41

–

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

No sound is output from the monitor connected with HDMI connections.

GVideoH

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

The on-screen display does not appear.

No picture appears.

No picture appears with HDMI connections.

Picture cannot be recorded.

DVDs cannot be copied on a VCR.

• The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to “Amp”.

• The format of the GUI and TV (PAL or NTSC) do not match.

• The connections between the AVR-3808 and monitor are faulty.

• The monitor’s input setting is wrong.

• PURE DIRECT mode is set.

• The player is connected using the component input connectors, the monitor is connected using the video (yellow) or S-Video output connectors.

• The connections to the HDMI connectors are faulty.

• HDMI input setting is improper.

• The monitor is not compatible with copyright protection (HDCP).

• The HDMI format of the player and monitor do not match.

• Input source does not match recorder’s video connection connector (video or S-Video).

–

• Set to “TV”. 30

• Match the format of the GUI and TV.

• Check the connections.

• Set properly.

• Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode.

• High deﬁnition (1080i/720p) and progressive (480p/576p) video signals are not down-converted. Set the player to interlace (480i/576i) signals.

• Check the connections.

• Check the HDMI input setting.

• Connect a monitor that is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP).

• Match the HDMI format of the player and monitor.

• The video conversion function does not work for the REC OUT connectors. Match the input source and recorder connections.

• This is not a malfunction. Most movie software includes copy prevention signals and cannot be copied.

11 ~ 22

–

40, 41

–

39 11

–



GiPodH

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

iPod cannot be played.

GNET/USBH

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

When a USB memory device is connected, “USB” is not displayed on the GUI menu.

Files on a USB memory device cannot be played.

The ﬁle names are not displayed properly (“...”, etc.).

• The input source assigned to “iPod dock” is not selected.

• Cable is not properly connected.

• Control Dock for iPod’s AC adapter is not connected to power outlet.

• The set cannot recognize a USB memory device.

• A USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards is connected.

• The set port and the connected port do not match.

• A USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected.

• USB memory device is connected via USB hub.

• USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32.

• USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions.

• Files are stored in a noncompatible format.

• You are attempting to play a ﬁle that is copyright protected.

• Characters that cannot be displayed are used.

• Switch to the input source assigned at “iPod dock”.

• Reconnect.

• Plug the Control Dock for iPod’s AC adapter into a power outlet.

• Check the connection.

• Connect a USB memory device conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards.

• Connect to the port set at “USB Select”.

• This is not a malfunction. DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power.

• Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port.

• Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32. For details, refer to the USB memor y device’s operating instructions.

• When divided into multiple partitions, only ﬁles stored in the top partition can be played.

• Record the ﬁles in a compatible format.

• Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.

• This is not a malfunction. On this set, characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with a “ . (period)”.

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

Internet radio cannot be played.

–

Files stored on a

–

computer cannot be played.

Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server.

Cannot connect to preset or favorite radio stations.

For some radio stations, “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed and station cannot be connected to.

Sound is broken during playback.

Sound quality is poor or played sound is noisy.

• Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is disconnected.

• Program is being broadcast in non-compatible format.

• The computer’s or router’s ﬁrewall is activated.

• Radio station is not currently broadcasting.

• IP address is wrong.

• Files are stored in a noncompatible format.

• You are attempting to play a ﬁle that is copyright protected.

• Set and computer are connected by USB cable.

• The computer’s or router’s ﬁrewall is activated.

• Computer’s power is not turned on.

• Server is not running.

• Set’s IP address is wrong.

• Radio station is not currently broadcasting.

• Radio station is not currently in service.

• Station is congested or not currently broadcasting.

• Network’s signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines or radio station is congested.

• File being played has a low bit rate.

• Check the connection status.

• Only Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this set.

• Check the computer’s or router’s ﬁrewall settings.

• Choose a radio station that is currently broadcasting.

• Check the set’s IP address.

• Record in a compatible format.

• Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.

• The set’s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer.

• Check the computer’s or router’s ﬁrewall settings.

• Turn on the power.

• Launch the ser ver.

• Check the set’s IP address.

• Wait a while before trying again.

• It is not possible to connect to radio stations that are no longer in service.

• Wait a while before trying again. –

• This is not a malfunction. When playing broadcast data with a high bit rate, the sound may be broken, depending on the communications conditions.

• This is not a malfunction. –

32, 33

–

33 53

–

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information

Troubleshooting



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Speciﬁcations

Audio section

• Power ampliﬁer Rated output: 130 W + 130 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 180 W + 180 W (6 Ω/ohms, JEITA)

Center: 130 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 180 W (6 Ω/ohms, JEITA) Surround (A + B): 130 W + 130 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 180 W + 180 W (6 Ω/ohms, JEITA) Surround back: 130 W + 130 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)

180 W + 180 W (6 Ω/ohms, JEITA) Dynamic power:

210 W x 2ch (4 Ω/ohms)

Output connectors:

Surround: A or B A + B

• Analog Input sensitivity / Input impedance: Frequency response: S/N: Distortion: Rated output:

• Digital D/A output: Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB) S/N ratio — 102 dB Dynamic range — 96 dB Digital input:

• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT) Input sensitivity: RIAA deviation: S/N: Rated output: Distortion factor:

Front:

140 W x 2ch (8 Ω/ohms)

Front, Center, Surround back 6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms

6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms

8 ~ 16 Ω/ohms

200 mV / 47 kΩ/kohms 10 Hz ~ 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode) 102 dB (DIRECT mode)

0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)

1.2 V

Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)

Format — Digital audio interface

2.5 mV ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz) 74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input) 150 mV

0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)

Video section

• Standard video connectors Input / output level and impedance: Frequency response:

• S-Video connectors Input / output level and impedance:

C (color) signal — 0.3 (PAL) / 0.286 (NTSC) Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response:

• Color component video connector Input / output level and impedance:

P P

Frequency response:

Tuner section [FM] [AM]

(note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10

Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz ~ 108.0 MHz 522 kHz ~ 1611 kHz Usable Sensitivity: 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) 18 µV 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)

STEREO 23 µV (38.5 dBf) S/N (IHF-A): MONO 77 dB STEREO 72 dB Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO 0.15 % STEREO 0.3 %

General

Power supply: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Power consumption:

0.3 W (Standby)

Maximum external dimensions: Mass: 17.8 kg

Main remote control unit (RC-1068)

Batteries: LR6/AA Type (two batteries) Maximum external dimensions: Mass: 190 g (including batteries)

Sub remote control unit (RC-1070)

Batteries: R03/AAA Type (two batteries) Maximum external dimensions:

Mass: 114 g (including batteries)

For purposes of improvement, speciﬁcations and design are subject to change without notice.

(JEITA) : Standards established by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).

1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)

Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)

Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

B / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms R / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

5 Hz ~ 100 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)

-15

550 W

434 (W) x 171 (H) x 420 (D) mm

63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm

49 (W) x 220 (H) x 24.5 (D) mm



List of preset codes

Denon Amp

Denon 81001, 82001, 83001, 84001

Denon Tuner

Denon (Analog) 52863, 52795, 52800, 52805

Denon Digital Tuner

Denon (NET/USB) 62865, 62837, 62838, 62839

Denon iPod

Denon 72815, 72816, 72817, 72818

Cable

A-Mark 00008, 00144

ABC 00237, 00003, 00008 Accuphase 00003 Acorn 00237 Action 00237 Active 00237 ADB 01230 Aichi Denshi 01512 Americast 00899 Amstrad 01222 Archer 00237 Auna 01230 Austar 00276 BCC 00276

Bell South 00899 Bestlink 00303 Birmingham Cable

Communications British Telecom 00003 Cable & Wireless 01068

Century 00008 Coship 01462 Daehan 00778

Daeryung 01877, 00877, 00477, 00008 Digeo 01187 Director 00476 DX Antenna 01500 Emerson 00303

Encon 00008 Fosgate 00276

Foxtel 01222 France Telecom 00817 Freebox 01482 Fujitsu 01497

00276

Galaxi 00008

GE 00237, 00144 Gehua 00476 General Instrument 00476, 00810, 00276, 00003 Gibralter 00003 GNI 01466 GoldStar 00144 Hitachi 00003, 00008

Hongtian Jiangsu 01462 Hwalin 00303 Insight 00476, 00810

Jerrold 00476, 00810, 00276, 00003

Jiuzhou 01445 KNC 00008

LG 00144

Macab 00817

Madritel 01230 Maspro 01510 Matav 01082 Memorex 00000 Mitsubishi 00003

Motorola

MS 00303 NEC 01496

Noos 00817 Nova Vision 00008 Novaplex 00008 NTL 00276, 00003, 01060, 01068 Oak 00303

Ono 01068 Optus 00276, 01060

Pace

Panasonic 00000, 00008, 00144, 01488 Paragon 00000, 00008, 00525 Penney 00000 Philips 01305, 00317, 00817

Pioneer

Pulsar 00000 PVP Stereo Visual

Matrix Quasar 00000

RadioShack 00303

Regal 00276 Runco 00000 Sagem 00817

Salora 00000

Samsung

Scientiﬁc Atlanta

01376, 00476, 00810, 00276, 01187

01877, 00877, 00237, 00008, 01060, 01068, 01577

01877, 00877, 00144, 00533, 01500

00003

00003, 00000, 00144, 00778, 00840, 01060, 01666 01877, 00877, 00477, 00237, 00003, 00000, 00008, 01510

Skyworth 01464 Sony 01006, 01460 Sprucer 00144 Starcom 00003 StarHub 00276 Sumitomo 01500, 01504 Supercable 00276 Taihan 00778

TCL 01445 Telewest 01068 Time Warner cable 01877 TongKook 00840 Torx 00003 Toshiba 00000, 01509 Trans PX 00276, 00303 TS 00003, 00303 United Cable 00276, 00003

US Electronics 00276, 00003, 00008 Videoway 00000

Visiopass 00817 Zenith 00000, 00525, 00899

Cable/PVR Combination b1

Americast 00899

Digeo 01187

Freebox 01482

General Instrument 00810

Jerrold 00810

Motorola 01376, 00810, 01187

Pace 01877, 00237

Pioneer 01877, 00877 Scientiﬁc Atlanta 01877, 00877

Sony 01006 Supercable 00276 Time Warner cable 01877

Zenith 00899

CD Player

Acoustic Research 40420

Advantage 40032 Aiwa 40157 Arcam 40157 Audio Research 40157 Audiolab 40157 Audiomeca 40157 Audioton 40157 AVI 40157

Balanced Audio

Technology

40157

Burmester 40420 Bush 40388 Cairn 40157

California Audio Labs Cambridge 40157 Cambridge Audio 40157

Cambridge Soundworks

Carver 40157, 40179 CDC 40420 CEC 40420 Copland 40393 Curtis Mathes 40032 Cyrus 40157

Denon

DKK 40000 DMX Electronics 40157 Dual 40003 Dynaco 40157 Dynamic Bass 40179 Fisher 40000, 40179

Garrard 40393, 40420

Genexxa 40000, 40032, 40037, 40179 Goldmund 40157 Grundig 40157 Haﬂer 40173

Harman/Kardon 40100, 40157, 40173 Hitachi 40032 Inkel 40157

Integra 40101 Jerrold 40003

JVC 40032, 40072

Kenwood

KLH 41318 Krell 40157 Linn 40157

Loewe 40157 Luxman 40393 LXI 40179 Magnavox 40157

Marantz 40029, 40157 Matsui 40157 MCS 40029

Memorex

Meridian 40157 Micromega 40157 Miro 40000 Mission 40157

40029, 40303

40157

40873, 40003, 40766,

[42867]z, 42868

40681, 40000, 40029, 40157, 40028, 40037, 40036, 40190

40000, 40032, 40179, 40420, 40468

Modulaire

MTC 40420 Musical Fidelity 40393 Myryad 40157 NAD 40000, 40721

Naim 40157 NSM 40157 Onkyo 40868, 40101

Optimus

Orion 40393 Panasonic 40029, 40303, 40388, 40752

Parasound 40420 Penney 40029 Philips 40157 Pioneer 40032, 40101, 40468 Polk Audio 40157 Proceed 40420 Proton 40157 QED 40157

Quad 40157 Quasar 40029 Radiola 40157

RadioShack

RCA

Realistic

Restek 40157 Revox 40157 Roksan 40420 Rotel 40157, 40420 Royal 40420 SAE 40157

Saisho 40000 Sansui 40000, 40157 Sanyo 40000, 40087, 40179 SAST 40157 Sears 40179 Sharp 40037 Siemens 40157 Silsonic 40036 Simaudio 40157 Sonic Frontiers 40157

Sony

Sugden 40157 Sylvania 40157 TAG McLaren 40157

Tandy 40032 Tascam 40393, 40420

40000, 40032, 40087, 40179, 40420, 40468

40000, 40032, 40037, 40087, 40179, 40393, 40420, 40468

40000, 40032, 40179, 40420, 40468 40032, 40053, 40179, 40420, 40468 40000, 40032, 40087, 40179, 40420, 40468

40490, 40000, 40100, 41364, 40185

PRESET CODE



Teac 40490, 40393, 40420 Technics 40029, 40303 Techwood 40303 Thomson 40053 Thorens 40157 Thule Audio 40157 Tokai 40420 Universum 40157, 40053

Victor 40072

Wadia 40393

Wards

Yamaha 40490, 40868, 40032, 40036

Yorx 40000

40000, 40032, 40157, 40053, 40087, 40179

CD Recorder

Denon 40766, 42868

JVC 40072

RCA 40053, 40420

Sony 40000, 40100, 41364

Teac 40420

Thomson 40053

Tape Deck

Aiwa 20029, 20197, 20200, 21315

Akai 20283, 20439 Arcam 20076 Audiolab 20029 Carver 20029

Denon

Fisher 20074

Garrard 20308, 20309, 20375, 20439

Genexxa 20439 GoldStar 20375 Grundig 20029, 20375 Harman/Kardon 20182, 20029, 21314

Inkel 20070, 20071, 20337

JVC

Kenwood

LG 20375

Luxman 20308, 20309 Magnavox 20029

Marantz 20029, 20009 Memorex 20099 Mitsubishi 20283, 20439 Myryad 20029 Onkyo 20135, 20136, 20282

Optimus 20027, 20220, 20337, 20439 Orion 20308, 20309

20076, 20371, 21311,

[22471]

20244, 20273, 20274, 20303, 20304, 20310, 21309 20070, 20071, 20092, 20233, 20234, 21364

Palladium 20375

Panasonic 20229 Philips 20029, 20229 Phonotrend 20337

Pioneer

Polk Audio 20029 Radiola 20029

RCA 20027, 20220 Revox 20029 Sansui 20029, 20009

Sanyo 20074 Sharp 20231, 20371 Sherwood 20337 Sonic 20375

Sony

TaeKwang 20439

Tandberg 20109

Teac

Technics 20229 Technovox 20229 Thorens 20029 Universum 20375, 20439

Victor 20244, 20273, 20274

Wards 20027, 20029

Wharfedale 20439 Yamaha 20097, 20094

20027, 20220, 20099, 20109, 21306, 21312

20243, 20170, 20291, 20234, 21313

20280, 20283, 20289, 20308, 20309

HDTV Tuner b1

ABS 01272

Accurian 01653 Alienware 01272 CyberPower 01272

D-Link 01554

Dgtec 01363 Epson 01563

Gateway 01272

Hewlett Packard 01272, 01267

Howard Computers 01272 HP 01272, 01267 Hush 01272 iBUYPOWER 01272

LG 01415

Linksys 01272, 01365 Media Center PC 01272

Microsoft 01272, 01805 Mind 01272 Motorola 01363 Niveus Media 01272

Northgate 01272

Packard Bell 01272

Panasonic 01120 Pioneer 01010 Ricavision 01272

Samsung 01190, 01490

Sensory Science 01126 Sharp 01010 SMC 01456 Sony 01272, 01324, 01364 Stack 9 01272 Sylvania 01563 Systemax 01272 Tagar Systems 01272

Toshiba 01272 Touch 01272 Viewsonic 01272, 01329

Vizio 01126 Voodoo 01272 Xbox 01805

ZT Group 01272

Satellite Receiver

@sat 01300

@Sky 01334 A-Mark 00345 ABsat 00123, 00713

ADB

AGS 00710 Aiwa 01514 Akai 00200

Alba

Allsat 00200, 01043 Alltech 00713 Allvision 01232, 01334, 01412 AlphaStar 00772 Amitronica 00713

Amstrad

Anglo 00713 Ankaro 00713 AntSat 01083 Apollo 00455 Arcon 01043, 01075 Armstrong 00200 Arnion 01300 Asat 00200 ASCI 01334 ASLF 00713 AssCom 00853 Astacom 00710

00642, 01259, 01367, 01418, 01473, 01491

00455, 00713, 01284, 01659, 01811

00345, 00713, 00795, 00847, 00863, 00882, 01113, 01175, 01693, 01801

Aston 00142 Astra 00713 Astratec 01743

Astro

Atlantic Telephone 01333 Atsat 01300 AtSky 01334 Audioline 01672 Aurora 00642, 00879, 01333, 01433

Austar

Axiel 00710 Axil 01457, 01659 Axis 01111 B@ytronic 01412

Beko 00455 Bell ExpressVu 00775 Big Sat 01457 Black Diamond 01284 Blaupunkt 00173 Blue Sky 00713 Boca 00713, 01232, 01366 Boston 00710, 01251 Brainwave 00658, 01672

British Sky Broadcasting

Broco 00713 BskyB 00847, 01175, 01662 BT 00710, 01296 Bubu Sat 00713

Bush

Canal 00853

Canal Digital 00853, 01622 Canal Satellite 00853, 01339, 01853 Canal+ 00853 Centrex 01457 CGV 01413, 01567 Chaparral 00216 Cherokee 00123, 00710 Chess 00713, 01085, 01334, 01626 Chili 01718

CityCom

Classic 01672 Clatronic 01413 CNS 01367 Comag 01232, 01366, 01412, 01413 Condor 01700 Conia 01695 Contec 00394 Continental Edison 01695 Coship 01457

00173, 00658, 01099, 01100, 01113

00497, 00642, 00863, 00879, 01176, 01259

00847, 01175, 01662, 01847

01284, 01645, 01672, 01743, 01811

00299, 00394, 00818, 01075, 01176, 01232

Crossdigital 01109 Crown 01284 Cryptovision 00455, 00795 Cyfra+ 01076 Cyrus 00200 D-box 00723, 00873, 01114

Daewoo 00713, 01111, 01296, 01743 Delfa 00863 Deltasat 01075 Dgtec 01542, 01631, 01242 Digenius 00299 Digiality 01685 Digifusion 01645, 01743 DigiLogic 01284 DigiQuest 00863, 01300, 01457, 01473 DigiSat 01232 Digisky 01457 DigitAll World 01227 Digiturk 01076 Digiwave 01631 Dijam 01296 DiPro 01367, 01543

DirecTV

Discovery 00710 Dish Network System Dishpro 01505, 01005, 00775, 01775 Distratel 01283, 01704 DMT 01075 DNT 00200 Dream Multimedia 01237 DSE 01375 DSTV 00642, 00879, 01433 Durabrand 01284 DX Antenna 01530

Echostar

Einhell 00713 Elap 00713, 01567 Elsat 00713 Elta 00200, 01659 Emme Esse 00871 Energy Sistem 01631 Engel 00713, 01251 EP Sat 00455 Esat 00879 Eurieult 00882

01377, 00392, 00566, 00639, 01639, 01142, 00247, 00749, 01749, 00724, 00819, 01856, 01076, 01108, 00099, 01109, 01414, 01442, 01609, 01392, 01640

01505, 01005, 00775, 01775

01505, 01005, 00775, 00455, 00610, 00713, 00853, 00871, 01086, 01200, 01323, 01409, 01418, 01473, 01775

PRESET CODE



Eurocrypt 00455 EuroLine 01251 Europa 00863 Europhon 00299 Eurosky 00262, 00299 Eurostar 00818 Eutelsat 00713 Expressvu 00775, 01775 Fenner 00713

Ferguson 00455, 01291, 01743 Finlandia 00455 Finlux 00455 Flair Mate 00713 FMD 01251, 01413, 01457 Force 01101 Fortec Star 01083

Foxtel

Fracapro Planet 00871 Fracarro 00125, 00871 France Telecom 00871 Freesat 00882 FTE 00863 FTEmaximal 00713, 00863

Fuba

Fugionkyo 00125 Funai 01377

Galaxis

Gardiner 00818 Garnet 01075 GbSAT 01214 GE 00392, 00566 Gecco 01412 General Instrument 00869 General Satellite 01176 GF Good Friends 01043 GF Star 01043

Globo

GOD Digital 00200 GOI 00775, 01775 Gold Box 00853 Gold Vision 01631 Golden Interstar 01283 GoldStar 00394 Goodmans 00455, 01284, 01291 Gradiente 00887 Granada 00455

Grundig

Handan 01622

Hanseatic 01099, 01100

00455, 00497, 00795, 00879, 01162, 01176, 01356

00173, 00262, 00299, 00394, 01214, 01251, 01801

00853, 00863, 01101, 01111, 01557

01251, 01334, 01412, 01429, 01626

00173, 00345, 00847, 00853, 00879, 01291

Hauppauge 01672 HB 01214, 01801 HDT 01159 Hills 01232

Hirschmann

Hisense 01535

Hitachi

Homecast 01214, 01680, 01700 Hornet 01300 Houston 00775 HTS 00775, 01775

Hughes Network Systems

Humax

Huth 01075 Hyundai 01075, 01159 iCan 01367

ID Digital 01176 ILLUSION sat 01557, 01631 iLo 01535 Imperial 01334, 01429, 01672 Indovision 00887 Ingelen 00882 Innova 00099 Interstar 01214 InVideo 00871 ISkyB 00887 Italtel 00871 ITT Nokia 00455, 00723, 00873 Jadeworld 00642

Jaeger 01334 Jerrold 00869 Jiuzhou 01450 JOK 00710 JVC 00775, 01507, 01531, 01775 K-SAT 00713

Kamm 00713 Kaon 01300 KaTelco 01111

Kathrein

Kennex 00125 Kenwood 00853 Klap 00710 Kocmoc TB 01333 Koscom 01043 Kosmos 00442, 01333 Kreiling 00249, 00658

00125, 00173, 00299, 00710, 00882, 01085, 01111, 01232, 01412

00749, 00819, 00455, 01250, 01284, 01518, 01523, 01525

01142, 00749, 01749, 01442

00863, 01176, 01225, 01406, 01427, 01675, 01743, 01790, 01915

00123, 00173, 00200, 00249, 00394, 00442, 00480, 00504, 00658, 00713, 00818, 01221, 01416, 01561, 01567

Kreiselmeyer 00173 Kross 01695 L&S Electronic 01043, 01334

Labgear 01296 LaSAT 00173, 00299 Lava 01631 Legend 01718 Legrand 01718 Lemon 01334 Lenco 00713 Lenoxx 01611 LG 01075, 01414 Lifesat 00299, 00713, 01043 Lodos 01284 Logik 01284 Logix 01075 Lorenzen 00299 Luxor 00345, 00873 M Electronic 00818

M vision 01557 Magnavox 00724, 00722 Manata 00710, 00713 Manhattan 00455, 00710, 01083 Marantz 00200 Maspro 00173, 00713, 01530 Master’s 00394 Matsui 00173, 00710, 01284, 01743 Maximum 01075, 01334, 01685 McIntosh 00869 MDS 01225 Mediabox 00853 Mediacom 01206 MediaSa 00853

Medion

Medison 00713 Mega 00200 Memorex 00724

Metronic

Metz 00173 MiCO 01811 Micro 00713 Micro Elektronic 00713 Micro Technology 00713 Micromaxx 00299 Microstar 01075 Microtec 00713 Mitsubishi 00749, 00455 Morgan’s 00200, 00713, 01232, 01412 Motorola 00869, 00856, 01473 MTEC 01214 Muller 01695

00299, 00713, 01043, 01075, 01232, 01334, 01412, 01626

00713, 00818, 01283, 01334, 01375, 01704

Multibroadcast 00642, 00879

Multichoice

Mx Onda 01659 Myryad 00200 Mysat 00713 MySky 01693, 01848, 01850 NEC 01519

NEOTION 01334 Netgem 01322 Netsat 00099, 00887 Neuf TV 01322 Neuhaus 00713 Neuling 01232 Neusat 00713 Nevir 01659 Next Level 00869 Nikko 00200, 00713, 00723 Noda Electronic 01704

Nokia

Nordmende 00455, 01611 OctalTV 01505

Okano 00442 Omega 00887 Opentel 01232, 01412

Optex

Optimus 00724 Optus 00879 Orbis 01232, 01334, 01412 Orbitech 01099, 01100 Origo 00497 OSAT 00345 P/Sat 01232

Pace

Paciﬁc 01284, 01375 Packard Bell 01111 Packsat 00710 Palcom 00299, 01409 Panarex 01159 Panasat 00615, 00879, 01333, 01433

Panasonic

Panda 00173, 00455 Pansat 01159 Patriot 00710 Paysat 00724 peeKTon 01457

00642, 00879, 01333, 01433, 01559, 01560

00455, 00723, 00751, 00853, 00873, 01023, 01223, 01723

00394, 00713, 01043, 01283, 01611

00200, 00329, 00455, 00497, 00795, 00847, 00853, 00887, 01175, 01323, 01356, 01423, 01693, 01717, 01848, 01850

00247, 00701, 00455, 00847, 01304, 01404, 01508, 01526, 01527

01142, 00749, 01749, 00775, 00724, 00819, 01076, 00722,

Philips

Phonotrend 00863, 01200 Pilotime 01339 Pino 01334

Pioneer

Planet 00871 Plasmatic 00442 PMB 00713, 01611 Polytron 00394 Portland 01296 Preisner 00262, 01101, 01113, 01366 Premier 00723, 00853, 00873, 01429 Prima 00795 Primacom 01111 Primestar 00869 Proﬁle 00710 Promax 00455 Proscan 00392, 00566 Proton 01535 QNS 01367, 01402, 01404

Quadral 00710 Quelle 00299 Radiola 00200

RadioShack 00566, 00775, 00869 Radix 00394, 00882, 01113, 01317

RCA

Rebox 01214 Regal 01251 RFT 00200 Roadstar 00713, 00853 Rollmaster 01413 Rover 00713 Rownsonic 01567 SAB 01251

Saba 00710, 00820 Sabre 00455

Sagem

Samsung

Sat Control 01300 Sat Team 00713 SAT+ 01409 Satec 00713 Satelco 01232 Satplus 01100

00099, 00710, 00455, 00818, 00200, 00847, 00853, 00173, 01114, 00133, 01442, 01543, 01672

01142, 00329, 00853, 01308, 01442

00392, 00566, 01142, 00775, 00855, 00143, 01291, 01392, 01442

00820, 01114, 01253, 01307, 01690 01377, 01142, 01276, 01108, 01109, 00853, 00863, 01206, 01442, 01458, 01570, 01609, 01700, 01916

PRESET CODE



Satstation 01083 Schaub Lorenz 01214 Schneider 00710, 01206, 01251

Schwaiger

SCS 00299 Sedea Electronique 00125, 01206, 01283, 01626 SEG 01075, 01087, 01251, 01626 Seleco 00871 Septimo 01375 Serd 01412 Serino 00610 Servimat 01611 ServiSat 00713, 01251 Sharp 01517 Siemens 00173, 01334, 01429 Silva 00299 Skantin 00713 SKR 00713

SKY

SKY Italia 00853, 01693, 01847, 01848 Sky Television 01014 Sky XL 01251, 01412 Sky+ 01175

Skymaster

Skymax 00200 Skyplus 01232, 01334, 01412 SkySat 00713 Skyvision 01334 SL 00299, 01672 SM Electronic 00713, 01200, 01409

Smart

Sony

Star 00887 Star Choice 00869 Star Trak 00772, 00869 Starland 00713 Starlite 00200 Stream 01847, 01848

Strong

Sunkai 00123 Sunny 01300 Sunsat 00713 Sunstar 00642 Supernova 00887 SVA 01455 Systec 01334

PRESET CODE



00394, 00504, 00863, 01075, 01083, 01111, 01317, 01334, 01412, 01457

00856, 00099, 00847, 00887, 01014, 01175, 01662, 01693, 01847, 01848, 01850

00713, 01075, 01085, 01200, 01334, 01409, 01567, 01611

00713, 00882, 01101, 01113, 01232, 01404, 01413 00639, 01639, 00455, 00847, 00853, 01524, 01558, 01640

00125, 00713, 00820, 00853, 00879, 01159, 01284, 01300, 01409, 01626

Tantec 00455

Tarbs 01225 Tatung 00455 TBoston 01659 Teac 01225, 01227, 01251, 01322 Tecatel 01200

TechniSat

Technomate 01283, 01610 Technosonic 01672 Technotrend 01429 Techwood 01284, 01626

Tele System Electronic

Teleciel 01043 TeleClub 01367 Telefunken 00710 Teleka 00262, 00442

Telestar

Telesystem 01801 Televes 00455, 01214, 01300, 01334 Televisa 00887 Telewire 01232 Tevion 00713, 01409, 01622, 01672

Thomson

Thorn 00455 Tiny 01672 Tioko 00394 Tivo 01142, 01442 Tokai 00200 Tonna 00455, 00713, 01611 Topﬁeld 01206, 01208, 01545, 01783

Toshiba

TPS 00820, 01253, 01307

Triax

Trio 01075 TT-micro 01429 Turnsat 00713 Twinner 00713, 01611 UEC 00879, 01162, 01333, 01356

UltimateTV 01392, 01640 Uniden 00724, 00722 Unisat 00200 United 01251

Universum

US Digital 01535 USDTV 01535

00262, 00455, 00863, 01099, 01100, 01195, 01197, 01322

01251, 01409, 01611, 01801

01099, 01100, 01251, 01334, 01610, 01626

00392, 00566, 00455, 00710, 00713, 00820, 00847, 00853, 01046, 01175, 01291, 01534, 01543, 01662

00749, 01749, 00790, 00819, 00455, 01285, 01501, 01516, 01530

00200, 00713, 00853, 01113, 01227, 01251, 01291, 01296, 01626

00173, 00299, 01087, 01099, 01251

Variosat 00173

Ventana 00200 Vestel 01251 VH Sat 00299 Viasat 01682 ViewSat 01232 Visionic 00125, 01283 VisionNet 01557

Visiosat

Viva 00856 Vivid 01162 Voom 00869 VTech 00818 Wavelength 01232, 01413

Wewa 00455 Wharfedale 01284 Winbox 01801 Wintel 00299 Wisi 00173, 00299, 00455

Worldsat

Xcom 00123

XMS 01075

Xsat

Xtreme 01300 Yakumo 01413

Yamada 01718 Yes 00887

Zehnder

Zenith 00856, 01856 Zeta Technology 00200 Zodiac 01801

00142, 00710, 00713, 01413, 01457, 01718

00123, 00710, 01214, 01251, 01543

00123, 00713, 00847, 01214, 01323

00394, 00504, 00818, 01075, 01232, 01251, 01334, 01412, 01413

Satellite Receiver/ PVR Combination b1, b3

@sat 01300

Allvision 01412 Amstrad 01175 Atsat 01300 B@ytronic 01412

British Sky Broadcasting

BskyB 01175, 01662 Bush 01645 Canal Satellite 01339

Comag 01412 Digifusion 01645

DigiQuest 01300 Digiturk 01076

01175

DirecTV

Dish Network System Dishpro 01505, 00775 DMT 01075 Dream Multimedia 01237 Echostar 01505, 00775, 00610

Expressvu 00775 Foxtel 01356

GbSAT 01214

Gecco 01412 Globo 01412 HDT 01159

Hirschmann 01412 Homecast 01680

Hughes Network Systems

Humax 01176, 01427, 01675 Huth 01075 Hyundai 01075, 01159 Kaon 01300

Kathrein 00249, 00658, 01221, 01561 LG 01075

Maximum 01334

Mediacom 01206 Medion 01412 Microstar 01075 Morgan’s 01412 Motorola 00869 MTEC 01214 Multichoice 01333, 01559, 01560 MySky 01693, 01848, 01850 NEOTION 01334

Nokia 01023 Opentel 01412

Orbis 01412 Pace 01175, 01356, 01423, 01850

Panasonic 01304 Philips 01142, 00099, 01442 Pilotime 01339 Proscan 00392 Radix 01317

RCA 01392 Rebox 01214 Sagem 01253, 01307

Samsung 01206, 01442, 01570, 01609 Sat Control 01300 Schneider 01206 Schwaiger 01075, 01412 Sedea Electronique 01206 Serd 01412 SKY 01175, 01693, 01848, 01850

01377, 00392, 00639, 01142, 01076, 00099, 01392, 01442, 01640

01505, 00775

01142, 01442

SKY Italia 01848 Sky XL 01412 Skymaster 01075 Skyplus 01412 Sony 00639, 01640 Star Choice 00869 Strong 01300 Sunny 01300 TechniSat 01195, 01197

Thomson 01175, 01534, 01662 Topﬁeld 01206, 01545, 01783 TPS 01253, 01307 Xtreme 01300

Zehnder 01075, 01412

Hughes Network

Systems Philips 20739

Samsung 20739

20739

Television

888 10264

A-Mark 10047, 10054, 10009

A.R. Systems

Accent 10009, 10037 Accuscan 10047 Accuscreen 10001 Acoustic Research 11269 Action 10030, 10650 Acura 10009 Addison 10092, 10108, 10653 ADL 11217

Admiral

Advent

Adventuri 10000 Adyson 10217 AEG 11163, 11556 Agashi 10217, 10264 Agna 10150

Aiko

Aim 10706, 10037, 10455, 10805 Aiwa 10264, 10701, 11904, 11911

Akai

10037, 10352, 10374, 10455, 10556

10047, 10054, 10017, 10051, 10093, 10463, 10180, 10163, 10264, 10418 10761, 10783, 10815, 10817, 10842, 10876, 11933

10092, 10009, 10035, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10361, 10371, 10433

10000, 10060, 10812, 10702, 10178, 10030, 10145, 10602, 10606, 10631, 10648, 10672, 10714, 10715, 11207, 11537, 11675, 11676, 11903, 10556, 10548, 10480, 10433, 10371, 10361, 10264, 10218, 10217, 10208, 10163, 10037, 10035, 10009

Akashi 10009, 10860 Akiba 10037, 10218, 10455 Akira 10418 Akito 10037

Akura

Alaron 10170

Alba

Albatron 10700, 10843 Alﬁde 10672 All-Tel 10865, 11269 Alleron 10030, 10170 Allorgan 10217 Allstar 10037 Ambassador 10150 America Action 10180 American High 10000, 10060 Amplivision 10217, 10370

Amstrad

Amtron 10000, 10180

Anam

Anam National 10250, 10037, 10650 Andersson 11149, 11163 Anglo 10009, 10264 Anhua 10051 Anitech 10009, 10037, 10264

Ansonic

AOC

Aolinpike 10264

Apex Digital

AR 10352, 10556 Arc En Ciel 10109 Arcam 10217 Ardem 10037, 10714 Aristocrat 10163 Aristona 10037, 10556 ART 11037 Arthur Martin 10163 ASA 10070 Asberg 10037 Asora 10009 Astra 10037 Asuka 10217, 10218, 10264 ATD 10698 Atlantic 10001, 10037

10171, 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10264, 10668, 10714, 11037, 11498, 11556, 11982

10009, 10036, 10037, 10073, 10163, 10218, 10352, 10370, 10371, 10418, 10443, 10487, 10668, 10714, 11037

10000, 10171, 10009, 10011, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10264, 10362, 10371, 10433, 10648, 11037, 11982

10250, 10180, 10009, 10037, 10700, 10861

10009, 10037, 10163, 10370, 10374, 10668 10451, 10093, 10180, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10092, 10009, 10108

10156, 10748, 10879, 10765, 10767, 11217, 11943

Atori 10009 Auchan 10163 Audinac 10180

Audiosonic

Audioton 10217, 10264, 10370, 10486

Audiovox

Audioworld 10698 Aumark 10060 Autovox 10217 Aventura 10171 AVP 10000

Awa

Axion 11937, 11958 Axxent 10009 Baier 10876

Baihe 10009, 10264 Baile 10001, 10009, 10374, 10661

Baird

Bang & Olufsen 10565 Baohuashi 10264 Baosheng 10009, 10817 Barco 10163, 10556

Basic Line

Bastide 10217 Bauer 10805

Baur

Baysonic 10180 Bazin 10217 Beaumark 10017, 10178, 10030

Beijing

Beko

Belcor 10030 Bell & Howell 10054, 10017, 10154, 10093 Belson 10698, 11191 Belstar 11037 BenQ 11032, 11756 Beon 10037, 10163, 10218, 10418 Berthen 10668 Best 10370 Bestar 10037, 10370, 10374 Bestar-Daewoo 10374 Binatone 10217

Black Diamond

10009, 10037, 10109, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10370, 10374, 10486, 10714, 10715, 10820

10451, 10180, 10092, 10623, 10802, 10875, 11937, 11951, 11952

10451, 10009, 10011, 10036, 10108, 10217, 10264, 10374, 10606

10037, 10073, 10109, 10208, 10217, 10343, 11196

10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10218, 10374, 10455, 10556, 10668, 11037, 11163

10037, 10195, 10361, 10455, 10512

10812, 10001, 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10374, 10661, 10817, 10821 10037, 10195, 10370, 10418, 10486, 10606, 10714, 10715, 10808, 11037

10614, 10820, 10821, 11037, 11163, 11909

Blackway 10218

Blaupunkt

Blue Sky

Boots 10009, 10217 BPL 10037, 10208 Bradford 10180

Brandt

Brinkmann 10037, 10418, 10486, 10668 Brionvega 10037, 10362 Britannia 10217 Brockwood 10178, 10030

Broksonic

Brother 10264 BSR 10163 BTC 10218

Bush

Caihong 10009, 10817

Cailing 10748 Candle 10030 Canton 10218

Capehart

Capetronic 10030 Capsonic 10264 Carad 10610, 10668, 11037 Carena 10037, 10455 Carnivale 10030 Carrefour 10036, 10037, 10070 Carver 10054, 10170 Cascade 10009, 10037 Casio 10037 Cathay 10037, 10218 CCE 10037, 10217 Celebrity 10000 Celera 10765 Celestial 10767, 10819, 10820, 10821 Centrex 10780 Centrum 11037 Centurion 10037 CGE 10074, 10163, 10370, 10418

Changcheng

Changfei 10009, 10374, 10817 Changfeng 10264, 10817 Changhai 10009, 10817

10036, 10170, 10195, 10200, 10327, 10455 10037, 10218, 10455, 10487, 10499, 10556, 10668, 10714, 10715, 11037, 11191, 11363

10109, 10287, 10335, 10560, 10625, 10714

10236, 10463, 10180, 11911, 11938

11900, 11556, 11037, 10778, 10714, 10698, 10668, 10661, 10614, 10556, 10487, 10374, 10371, 10361, 10335, 10264, 10218, 10217, 10208, 10163, 10037, 10036, 10009

10017, 10178, 10030, 10092, 10036

10051, 10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10661, 10817

10156, 10765, 10009, 10264,

Changhong

Chengdu 10009, 10817 Ching Tai 10092, 10009

Chun Yun

Chunfeng 10009, 10264 Chung Hsin 10180, 10053, 10036, 10108 Chunsun 10009, 10817 Cimline 10009, 10218 Cinema 10672 Cineral 10451, 10092 Cinex 10648, 11556 Citek 10047

Citizen

City 10009 Clarion 10180 Clarivox 10037, 10070, 10418 Classic 10030, 10092, 10499

Clatronic

Clayton 11037 CMS Hightec 10217

Colortyme

Commercial Solutions Concorde 10009

Condor

Conia 10820, 10821, 11498 Conic 10178 Conrac 10808

Conrowa

Contec 10180, 10009, 10036, 10037 Continental Edison 10109, 10287, 10487 Cosmel 10009, 10037 Craig 10180, 10171

Crosley

Crown

Crown Mustang 10672 CS Electronics 10218 CTX 11756

Curtis Mathes

CXC 10180 Cybertron 10218 Cytronix 11298 D-Vision 10037, 10556, 11982

10508, 10767, 10783, 10817, 10819, 10820, 10821, 11008, 11156

10000, 10180, 10092, 10009, 10700, 10843

10054, 10000, 10451, 10463, 10180, 10060, 10030, 10171, 10092, 10001, 10035

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10370, 10371, 10714

10047, 10054, 10017, 10060, 10178, 10030

11447, 10047

10009, 10037, 10264, 10370, 10418

10156, 10145, 10009, 10264, 10698, 11156, 11170

10054, 10000, 10180, 10030, 10171, 10074, 10163, 10370 10093, 10180, 10053, 10009, 10037, 10208, 10370, 10418, 10486, 10487, 10606, 10672, 10712, 10714, 10715, 11037

10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10051, 10451, 10093, 10180, 10060, 10702, 10178, 10030, 10145, 10166, 10037, 10035, 11147, 11347

10154, 10451, 10180, 10178, 10030, 10092, 11661, 10634, 10661, 10672, 10700, 10860,

Daewoo

Dainichi 10218

Dansai

Dantax 10370, 10486, 10714, 10715 Datsura 10208 Dawa 10009, 10037 Daytek 10672, 11207 Dayton 10092, 10009, 11207

Daytron

Dayu 10374, 10661 De Graaf 10163, 10208, 10548 Decca 10037, 10217 Degraff 10163, 10208 Deitron 10374 Dell 11080, 11178 Denko 10264 Denon 10145, 10511 Denver 10037, 10587 Desmet 10009, 10037 Diamant 10037

Diamond

Digatron 10037 Digiline 10037, 10668 Digital Life 10872 Digitex 10820 Digitor 10037 Digix Media 10880 Dixi 10009, 10037, 10217 DL 10587, 10780, 10872 Domeos 10668 Domland 10394 Dongda 10009 Donghai 10009 Dream Vision 11164, 11704 DSE 10698, 10820, 11556 DTS 10009

Dual

Dual Tec 10217

Dumont

Durabrand

Dux 10037 Dwin 10093 Dynatech 10217 Dynatron 10037

10865, 10876, 10880, 11755, 11756, 11909, 10623, 10556, 10499, 10374, 10264, 10218, 10217, 10170, 10109, 10108, 10037, 10036, 10009

10009, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10208, 10217

10180, 10178, 10030, 10092, 10009, 10036, 10037, 10374

10706, 10009, 10371, 10672, 10698, 10820, 10860

10037, 10217, 10343, 10352, 10394, 11037, 11137

10017, 10180, 10178, 10070, 10217 10463, 10180, 10178, 10171, 11034, 11463

PRESET CODE



Easy Living 11248

Eaton 10060 Ecco 10773 ECE 10037 Edison-Minerva 10487

Elbe

Elcit 10163 Electroband 10000 Electrograph 11755

Electrohome

Elekta 10009, 10264 Elfunk 11037, 11208 ELG 10037 Elin 10009, 10037, 10361, 10548 Elite 10037, 10218 Elta 10009, 10264 Emerald 10178

Emerson

Envision 10030, 10813 Enzer 10860 Erae 11371 Erres 10037 ESA 10812, 10171, 11944 ESC 10037, 10217 Ether 10030, 10009 Etron 10001, 10009, 10163, 10820 Eurofeel 10217, 10264 Euroman 10037, 10217, 10264, 10370 Europa 10037 Europhon 10037, 10109, 10217 Evesham Technology 11248 Evolution 11756 Expert 10163 Exquisit 10037 Feilang 10009

Feilu 10009, 10817 Feiyan 10264 Feiyue 10009, 10817 Fenner 10009, 10374 Fer0 10335

Ferguson

Fidelity

Filsai 10217

Finlandia

PRESET CODE



10037, 10217, 10218, 10362, 10610

10154, 10000, 10463, 10150, 10178, 10030, 10073

10047, 10017, 10154, 10451, 10236, 10463, 10180, 10150, 10178, 10171, 11944, 11911, 11909, 10714, 10668, 10623, 10486, 10036, 10371, 10370, 10361, 10037, 10195, 10170, 10070, 10073

10053, 10037, 10073, 10109, 10195, 10287, 10335, 10343, 10443, 10548, 10560, 10625, 11037 10171, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10264, 10361, 10371, 10512

10163, 10208, 10346, 10361, 10548

Finlux

Firstar 10236, 10009

Firstline

Fisher

Flint

Force 11149 Formenti 10037, 10163 Fortress 10093 Fraba 10037, 10370

Friac

Frontech 10009, 10163, 10217, 10264 Fujimaro 10865, 11498

Fujitsu

Fujitsu General 10009, 10217, 10683 Fujitsu Siemens 10808, 10809, 11163, 11298

Funai

Furi 10145, 10264, 10817 Furichi 10860 Futronic 10264, 10860 Futuretech 10180 Galaxi 10037

Galaxis 10037, 10370 Ganxin 10817 Gateway 11755, 11756 GBC 10009, 10163, 10218, 10374

GEC 10037, 10163, 10217, 10361 Geloso 10009, 10163, 10374 Gemini 10047 General 10109, 10287 General Technic 10009 Genesis 10009, 10037 Genexxa 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218

Gericom

Gevalt 11371 Giant 10009, 10217 Gibralter 10017, 10000, 10030 Go Video 10060, 10886 Go Vision 11937 Goldfunk 10668

GoldStar

10037, 10070, 10163, 10217, 10346, 10480, 10556, 10631, 10714, 10715, 10808, 11556

10009, 10037, 10208, 10217, 10361, 10374, 10556, 10668, 10714, 10808, 11037, 11191, 11363, 11371 10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10036, 10208, 10217, 10361, 10370 10037, 10218, 10264, 10455, 10610

10009, 10037, 10370, 10499, 10610

10009, 10217, 10352, 10683, 10809, 10853

10000, 10180, 10171, 10264, 10668, 11271, 11904

11447, 10047, 11454, 10000, 10051, 10451, 10093, 10180, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10092, 11922, 11917, 11347, 11147, 10625, 10560, 10335, 10035

10808, 10865, 10880, 11217, 11298

10047, 10054, 10154, 10178, 10030, 10715, 10714, 10606, 10455, 10361, 10217, 10163, 10109, 10073, 10037, 10036, 10009, 10001

Gooding 10487

Goodmans

Gorenje 10370 GPM 10218 Gradiente 10053, 10037, 10170

Graetz

Gran Prix 10648

Granada

Grandin

Gronic 10217

Grundig

Grundy 10180, 10195 Grunkel 11163 Grunpy 10180 H & B 10808

Haaz 10706

Haier

Haihong 10009 Haiyan 10264, 10817 Halifax 10217, 10264 Hallmark 10236, 10180, 10178 Hampton 10217 Hanimex 10218 Hankook 10180, 10178, 10030

Hanseatic

Hantarex 10009, 10037, 10865 Hantor 10037

Harley Davidson

Harman/Kardon 10054 Harsper 10865 Harvard 10180 Harwa 10773, 11196, 11269 Harwood 10009, 10037, 10487 Hauppauge 10037 Havermy 10093

HCM

Heathkit 10017 Helios 10865 Hello Kitty 10451

10000, 11909, 11900, 11163, 11037, 10880, 10808, 10714, 10668, 10661, 10634, 10625, 10587, 10560, 10556, 10499, 10487, 10480, 10374, 10371, 10343, 10335, 10264, 10218, 10217, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10011, 10009

10163, 10361, 10371, 10487, 10714, 11163

10036, 10037, 10108, 10163, 10208, 10217, 10226, 10343, 10548, 10560 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10374, 10455, 10610, 10668, 10714, 10715, 10865, 10880, 11037, 11191

10706, 10009, 10036, 10037, 10070, 10163, 10195, 10443, 10487, 10556, 10587, 10672, 10683, 11371

11034, 10037, 10508, 10587, 10698, 11017

10009, 10037, 10217, 10361, 10370, 10394, 10499, 10556, 10634, 10661, 10714, 10808

10000, 10180, 10060, 10178, 10030, 11904

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10418

Hema 10009, 10217 Hewlett Packard 11494, 11502 Hiﬁvox 10109 Highline 10037, 10264 Hikona 10218 Hikone 10218

Hinari

Hisawa 10218, 10455, 10610, 10714

Hisense

Hitachi

Hitachi Fujian 10150, 10108, 10860 Hitec 10698 Hitsu 10009, 10218, 10455, 10610 Hoeher 10714, 10865, 11163, 11556 Home Electronics 10606 Hongmei 10093, 10009, 10264, 10817 Hongyan 10264, 10817 Hornyphon 10037 Hoshai 10218, 10455 HP 11494, 11502 Hua Tun 10009 Huafa 10145, 10009 Huanghaimei 10009 Huanghe 10009, 10817 Huanglong 10009 Huangshan 10009, 10264, 10817 Huanyu 10217, 10264, 10374, 10817 Huaqiang 10264 Huari 10145, 10264 Hugoson 11217 Huodateji 10051 Hygashi 10217 Hyper 10009, 10217 Hypersonic 10361

Hypson

Hyundai

Iberia 10037

ICE

ICeS 10218 Iiyama 10877, 11217

10009, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10208, 10218, 10264, 10352, 10443

10156, 10748, 10145, 10009, 10208, 10508, 10556, 10780, 10821, 10860, 11022, 11156, 11170, 11208, 11363 10047, 10054, 10017, 10000, 11256, 10156, 10051, 10150, 10178, 10030, 11145, 10145, 10092, 10744, 10877, 10634, 11037, 11137, 11149, 11156, 11170, 11225, 11576, 11904, 11960, 10578, 10548, 10508, 10499, 10481, 10480, 10343, 10217, 10163, 10109, 10108, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10009

10037, 10217, 10264, 10455, 10486, 10556, 10668, 10714, 10715, 11037 10849, 10860, 10865, 10876, 11556

10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10371

Ima 10236, 10180, 10178 Imperial 10037, 10074, 10370, 10418

Imperial Crown

Indiana 10037 Inﬁnity 10054 InFocus 11164 Ingelen 10163, 10487, 10610, 10714 Ingersol 10009 Inno Hit 10009, 10217, 10218, 11163 Innova 10037 Innowert 10865, 11298 Inotech 10773, 10820 Insignia 10171, 11517 Inteq 10017, 10145 Interbuy 10009, 10037, 10264

Interfunk

Internal 10037, 11909

Intervision

Irradio 10009, 10037, 10218, 10371 Isukai 10037, 10218, 10455 ITC 10217 ITS 10037, 10218, 10264, 10371

ITT

ITT Nokia

ITV 10037, 10264, 10374 IX 10877 JBL 10054

JCB 10000 JDV 11982

Jean

JEC 10035 Jensen 10761, 10815, 10817, 11933 Jiahua 10051 JiaLiCai 10009, 10264 JIL 10030 Jinfeng 10051, 10208, 10226, 10817 Jinque 10009, 10264, 10817 Jinta 10009, 10264

Jinxing

JMB 10443, 10499, 10556, 10634 JNC 10876 Jocel 10712 Johnson 10455 Jubilee 10556 Juhua 10264, 10817 Jutan 10030

10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10661

10037, 10109, 10163, 10200, 10327, 10361, 10512

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10394, 10455, 10486, 10487

10163, 10208, 10346, 10361, 10480, 10548, 10610 10070, 10163, 10195, 10208, 10346, 10361, 10480, 10548, 10606, 10610

10156, 10051, 10236, 10092, 10009, 10036

10054, 10156, 10145, 10009, 10037, 10264, 10556, 10698, 10817, 10821, 11011

10054, 10093, 10463, 10053,

JVC

Kaige 10009, 10264, 10817

Kaisui

Kambrook 10217 Kamp 10017, 10180, 10217

Kangli

Kangyi 10009, 10264 Kapsch 10163, 10361

Karcher

Kathrein 10556 Kawa 10371 Kawasho 10030 KB Aristocrat 10163 KDS 11498 KEC 10180, 10060

Kendo

Kennedy 10163 Kennex 10668, 11037 Kenwood 10180, 10030 Khind 10706 KIC 10217 Kiota 10001, 10371, 10455 Kioto 10706, 10556 Kiton 10037, 10668

KLH

KLL 10037 Kloss 10030

Kneissel

Kolin

Kolster 10037, 10218 Kongque 10009, 10264, 10817 Konichi 10009 Konig 10037

Konka

Kontakt 10487 Korpel 10037 Korting 10370 Kosmos 10037 Koyoda 10009 Kreisen 10876 KTV 10463, 10180, 10030, 10217 Kuaile 10009, 10264 Kulun 10009

Kunlun

10030, 10070, 10036, 10218, 10371, 10418, 10508, 10606, 10650, 10653, 10683, 10731, 11253, 11923

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10455

10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10661, 10817

10264, 10370, 10606, 10610, 10714, 10778, 11556

10037, 10362, 10370, 10610, 10648, 11037

10156, 10180, 10765, 10767, 11962

10037, 10362, 10370, 10374, 10499, 10556, 10610 10180, 10150, 10053, 10036, 10108, 11331

10180, 10037, 10218, 10371, 10418, 10587, 10641, 10714, 10817, 11084

10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10374, 10661, 10817

Kyoshu 10418 Kyoto 10163, 10217 L&S Electronic 10714, 10808, 10865

Lark 10154 LaSAT 10486 Lavis 11037 Leader 10009 Lecson 10037 Legend 10009 Lenco 10037, 10374, 10587 Lenoir 10009 Lexsor 11196 Leyco 10037, 10264

Liesenk & Tter 10037 Liesenkotter 10037, 10327

Lifetec

Lihua 10817

Lloyd’s

Local India TV 10009, 10208, 10602 Local Malaysia TV 10698 Lodos 11037

Loewe

Logik

Logix 10668 Longjiang 10264, 10817 Luker 11982

Luma

Lumatron

Lux May 10009, 10037

Luxor

LXI

M Electronic

Madison 10037 MAG 11498 Magnadyne 10054, 10163 Magnafon 10073

Magnasonic

10054, 11265, 10060, 10178, 10030, 11758, 11637, 11191, 11178, 10856, 10715, 10714, 10700, 10698, 10556, 10370, 10361, 10217, 10163, 10109, 10108, 10037, 10009, 10001

10009, 10037, 10218, 10374, 10668, 10683, 10714, 11037, 11137

10236, 10180, 10030, 10001, 10009, 11904

10037, 10370, 10512, 10633, 10790 10236, 10180, 10060, 10001, 10009, 10011, 10371, 10698, 10773, 10880, 11037, 11217

10009, 10163, 10362, 10374, 11037 10037, 10073, 10163, 10217, 10264, 10361, 10556

10163, 10208, 10217, 10346, 10361, 10480, 10548, 10631, 11037, 11163 10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10051, 10093, 10060, 10053, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10166, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10001, 10208 10009, 10037, 10109, 10163, 10195, 10217, 10287, 10343, 10346, 10374, 10480, 10512, 10634, 10661, 10714

10054, 10000, 10156, 10093, 10030, 10092, 10109

10047, 11454, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10250, 10051, 10180,

Magnavox

Magnum 10037, 10648, 10714, 10715 Majestic 10017 Mandor 10264 Manesth 10035, 10037, 10217, 10264

Manhattan

Marantz

Mark

Master’s 10499 Mastro 10053, 10706, 10698, 10780

Masuda

Matsui

Matsushita 10250, 10051, 10650 Maxdorf 10773 Maxent 11755, 11756 Maxim 11556, 11982 MCE 10009 Meck 10698 Mediator 10037, 10556

Medion

Megapower 10700 Megas 10610 Megatron 10047, 10178, 10145, 10009 MEI 11037 Meile 10264, 10817

Memorex

Memphis 10009 Mercury 10060, 10001, 10009, 10037 Mermaid 10037 Metronic 10625

Metz

MGA

MGN Technology 10178 Micro Genius 10150

Micromaxx

Microstar 10808 MicroTEK 10820, 10860 Midland 10047, 10017, 10051 Mikomi 11037, 11149

10060, 10030, 10171, 10092, 10706, 11944, 11904, 11755, 11254, 10802, 10780, 10011, 10035, 10037, 10036

10037, 10668, 10778, 10876, 11037, 11267 11454, 10054, 10030, 10037, 10556, 10704, 10855 10009, 10037, 10217, 10374, 10714, 10715

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10371 11037, 10744, 10714, 10556, 10487, 10455, 10443, 10433, 10371, 10352, 10335, 10217, 10208, 10195, 10163, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10011, 10009

10037, 10512, 10556, 10668, 10698, 10714, 10808, 10880, 11037, 11137, 11248, 11900

10154, 10250, 10463, 10180, 10150, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10009, 10035, 10037, 10195, 10877, 11037, 11911

10037, 10195, 10367, 10388, 10447, 10587, 10668, 10746, 11163 10150, 10178, 10030, 10218, 10374

10037, 10668, 10714, 10808, 11037

Minato 10037, 10556 Minerva 10070, 10108, 10195, 10487 Minoka 10037 Mirror 11900

Mitsubishi

Mivar 10217 Monaco 10009 Monivision 10700, 10843 Morgan’s 10037 Motorola 10054, 10051, 10093, 10150

MTC

MTlogic 10714

Mudan

Multitec

Multitech

Murphy 10163 Musikland 10218 Mx Onda 11498 Myryad 10556

NAD

Naiko 10037, 10606, 11982 Nakimura 10037, 10374 Nanbao 10009, 10264 Nansheng 10264, 10817 Narita 11982 NAT 10226 National 10051, 10208, 10226, 10508

NEC

Neckermann

NEI 10037, 10163, 10371 Neovia 10865, 10876, 11371 Netsat 10037 NetTV 11755

Neufunk

New Tech

New World 10218 Newave 10093, 10178, 10092, 10009

Nikkai

Nikkei 10714 Nikko 10178, 10030, 10092 Nikkodo 10178, 10030, 10092

10154, 10250, 10093, 10236, 10180, 11250, 10150, 10178, 10030, 11917, 11037, 10836, 10817, 10556, 10512, 10195, 10108, 10037, 10036, 10011

10180, 10060, 10030, 10092, 10011, 10370, 10512

10051, 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10817 10037, 10486, 10668, 11037, 11556 10180, 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10370, 10486

10156, 10178, 10166, 10037, 10361, 10866, 11156

10047, 10154, 10156, 10051, 10053, 10178, 10030, 11704, 11270, 11170, 10817, 10704, 10661, 10653, 10508, 10499, 10455, 10374, 10264, 10217, 10170, 10036, 10011, 10009 10037, 10200, 10327, 10370, 10418, 10556

10009, 10037, 10218, 10556, 10610, 10714 10009, 10037, 10217, 10343, 10556

10009, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10218, 10264

Nishi 10030 Nobliko 10070 Nogamatic 10109

Nokia

Norcent 10748, 10824 Nordic 10217

Nordmende

Normerel 10037 Novatronic 10037, 10374 NTC 10092 Nu-Tec 10455, 10698, 10820 Nyon 10000 Oceanic 10163, 10208, 10361, 10548

Odeon 10264 Okano 10009, 10037, 10264, 10370 Olevia 11144, 11240, 11331, 11610 Omega 10264 Omni 10748, 10698, 10780, 10872 Onida 10053, 11253 Onimax 10714

Onwa

Opera 10037

Optimus

Optoma 10887 Optonica 10093 Orbit 10037 Orcom 11504

Orion

Orline 10037, 10218 Ormond 10668, 11037

Osaki

Osio 10037 Oso 10218 Osume 10036, 10037, 10218 Otic 11498

Otto Versand

Pace 10092

Paciﬁc

Palladium

Palsonic

Panama 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264 Panashiba 10001

10163, 10208, 10346, 10361, 10374, 10480, 10548, 10606, 10610, 10631

10037, 10109, 10195, 10287, 10343, 10560, 10714

10180, 10218, 10371, 10433, 10602

10154, 10250, 10093, 10180, 10150, 10178, 10030, 10166, 10650

10017, 10236, 10463, 10180, 10178, 11463, 10011, 10037, 10264, 10443, 10556, 10714, 10880, 11196, 11911

10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10374, 10556

10093, 10036, 10037, 10109, 10195, 10217, 10226, 10343, 10361, 10512, 10556

10037, 10443, 10556, 10714, 11037, 11137 10037, 10163, 10200, 10217, 10327, 10370, 10418, 10556, 10714, 11137 10001, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10418, 10698, 10773, 10778, 11196, 11269, 11904

PRESET CODE



10054, 10000, 10156, 10250, 10051, 10236, 10030, 11947,

Panasonic

Panavision 10037

Panda

Pathe Cinema 10163 Pathe Marconi 10109 Pausa 10009 Paxonic 10060, 10030

PCE 10156, 10060

Penney

Perdio 10037, 10163 Perfekt 10037 Petters 11523

Philco

Philharmonic 10217

Philips

Phocus 10714 Phoenix 10037, 10163, 10370, 10486 Phonola 10037, 10556

Pilot

Pioneer

Pionier 10370, 10486, 11556 Plantron 10009, 10037, 10264 Playsonic 10037, 10217, 10714, 10715

Polaroid

Poppy 10009 Portland 10451, 10092, 10374 Powerpoint 10037, 10487, 10698 Prandoni-Prince 10361 Precision 10236, 10180, 10217 Premier 10009, 10264 President 10860

Prima

Princeton 10700 Prinston 11037 Prinz 10361 Prism 10250, 10051

PRESET CODE



11946, 11941, 11480, 11310, 11291, 11271, 10853, 10650, 10548, 10508, 10367, 10361, 10226, 10208, 10163, 10108, 10037, 10035

10051, 10706, 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10508, 10698, 10780, 10817, 10821

10047, 10000, 10156, 10250, 10051, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10070, 10108, 11347

10054, 10451, 10463, 10180, 10178, 10030, 10145, 11661, 10037, 10074, 10163, 10370, 10418

11454, 10054, 10017, 10000, 10051, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10092, 11961, 11756, 11254, 10690, 10556, 10512, 10374, 10361, 10343, 10200, 10108, 10037, 10009

10051, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10706, 10011 10166, 10011, 10037, 10109, 10163, 10170, 10287, 10361, 10370, 10486, 10512, 10679, 10760, 10866, 11260

10765, 10865, 11276, 11316, 11341, 11498, 11523

10761, 10009, 10264, 10783, 10815, 10817, 11269, 11933

Profex 10009, 10163, 10361 Proﬁ 10009 Proﬁlo 11556 Proﬁtronic 10037

Proline

Proscan 11447, 10047, 11347, 11922 Prosco 10156

Prosonic

Protec 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264

Protech

Proton 10178, 10030, 10001, 10009

Proview 11498

ProVision 10037, 10556, 10714, 11037 Pulsar 10017, 10092 Pulser 10178, 10092 Pvision 10876, 11191 Pye 10037, 10374, 10556 Pymi 10009

Qingdao

Quadral 10051, 10218 Quartz 10150, 10178

Quasar

Quelle

Questa 10036 Questar 10036 R-Line 10037

Rabbit 10047 Radialva 10163, 10218 Radiola 10037, 10217, 10556 Radiomarelli 10037

RadioShack

Radiotone

Rank 10070 Rank Arena 10036, 10602 RBM 10070

RCA

Realistic

Recor 10037, 10418 Rectiligne 10037

Rediffusion

Redstar 10037 Reﬂex 10037, 10668, 11037

Relisys

10037, 10073, 10625, 10634, 11037

10037, 10217, 10370, 10371, 10374, 10668, 10714

10009, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10418, 10486, 10668, 11037

10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10817

10250, 10051, 10009, 10035, 10650, 10865 10011, 10037, 10070, 10074, 10109, 10195, 10200, 10327, 10361, 10512, 10668, 11037

10047, 10154, 10180, 10150, 10178, 10030, 10037, 11904 10009, 10037, 10264, 10370, 10418, 10648, 10668, 11037

11447, 10047, 11454, 10054, 10000, 10051, 10093, 10178, 10030, 10092, 11958, 11953, 11948, 11922, 11917, 11547, 11347, 11247, 11147, 11047, 10679, 10625, 10560, 10090 10047, 10154, 10180, 10150, 10178, 10030

10036, 10163, 10346, 10361, 10548

10865, 10876, 10877, 11207, 11298

Remotec

Reoc 10714 Revox 10037 Rex 10163, 10264 RFT 10037, 10264 Rinex 10773

Roadstar

Rolson 11371 Rover 10036, 10877

Rowa

Royal Lux 10335, 10370 Runco 10017, 10060, 10030 Ruyi 10817

Saba

Sagem 10455, 10610, 10618 Saige 10009, 10817

Saisho

Saivod

Sakai 10163 Sakyno 10455

Salora

Salsa 10335

Sampo

Samsung

Sandra 10217 Sanjian 10264 Sanky 10060, 10030

Sansui

Santon 10009

Sanyo

Sanyong 10037 Sanyuan 10093, 10009, 10817 Saville 10060

10250, 10093, 10145, 10171, 10037

10009, 10037, 10218, 10264, 10418, 10668, 10714, 11037, 11900

10748, 10009, 10037, 10264, 10587, 10698, 10712, 10817

10250, 10109, 10163, 10287, 10335, 10343, 10361, 10498, 10548, 10560, 10625, 10714

10009, 10011, 10163, 10217, 10264 10037, 10668, 10712, 11037, 11163, 11556, 11982

10163, 10208, 10361, 10480, 10548, 10631

10047, 10154, 10093, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10092, 10009, 10036, 10650, 10700, 11755, 11756 10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10156, 10093, 10060, 10812, 10702, 10178, 10030, 10092, 10814, 10766, 10718, 10618, 10587, 10817, 10821, 11060, 11249, 11312, 11903, 11959, 10556, 10371, 10370, 10362, 10264, 10226, 10217, 10208, 10163, 10090, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10009

10463, 10060, 10030, 10706, 10037, 10371, 10455, 10602, 10714, 10861, 11371, 11537, 11904, 11911

10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10463, 10180, 10145, 10171, 11755, 11208, 10704, 10508, 10370, 10264, 10217, 10208, 10170, 10163, 10108, 10088, 10037, 10036, 10011, 10009

SBR 10037, 10556 Sceptre 11217

Schaub Lorenz

Schneider

Scotch 10178 Scotland 10163 Scott 10236, 10180, 10178, 10030

Sears

Seaway 10634 Seelver 11037

SEG

SEI 10037, 10163 Sei-Sinudyne 10037

Seleco

Semivox 10180 Semp 10156 Sencora 10009 Sentra 10035 Serino 10093, 10455, 10610 Shancha 10264, 10817

Shanghai

Shaofeng 10145, 10817

Sharp

Shen Ying 10092, 10009 Shencai 10145, 10009, 10264 Sheng Chia 10093, 10236, 10009 Shenyang 10009, 10264, 10817 Sherwood 10009 Shintoshi 10037

Shivaki

Show 10009, 10418 Siarem 10163

Siemens

Siera 10037, 10556 Siesta 10370 Signature 10047, 10093, 10030 Silva 10037, 10361, 10648 Silva Schneider 10037, 11556 Silvano 10587 Silver 10036, 10361, 10455, 10715 SilverCrest 11037

10361, 10374, 10486, 10548, 10606, 10714, 11191 11982, 11904, 11137, 11037, 10714, 10668, 10648, 10556, 10394, 10371, 10361, 10352, 10343, 10218, 10217, 10163, 10070, 10037

10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10051, 10093, 10060, 10053, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10166, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10001, 10208, 11904

10009, 10036, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10362, 10487, 10668, 11037, 11163

10163, 10264, 10346, 10362, 10371

10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10817

10054, 10093, 10180, 10053, 10030, 10009, 10036, 10200, 10650, 10653, 10668, 11193, 11393, 11917

10178, 10037, 10374, 10443, 10556

10145, 10037, 10195, 10200, 10327

Simpson 10178, 10030, 10011

Singer

Sinotec 10773 Sinudyne 10037, 10163, 10361 Skantic 10163 SKY 10037, 10880, 11504 Sky Brazil 10880 Sky-North 10037 Skygiant 10180

Skyworth

Sliding 10865, 10880 SLX 10668 Smaragd 10487 Soemtron 10865, 11298 Solar Drape 10000 Solavox 10037, 10163, 10361, 10548 Sole 10813 Sonawa 10218 Songba 10009 Soniko 10037 Sonitron 10208, 10217, 10370 Sonneclair 10037 Sonoko 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264 Sonolor 10163, 10208, 10361, 10548 Sontec 10009, 10037, 10370

Sony

Sound & Vision 10218, 10374 Soundesign 10180, 10178 Soundwave 10037, 10418, 10715 Sova 11952

Sowa

Soyea 10773 Spectra 10009 Spectravision 10156, 10178 Spectroniq 11498 Squareview 10171 SR2000 10154, 10171 Ssangyong 10009 SSS 10180 Staksonic 10009

Standard

Standard Components

Starlite

Stenway 10218 Stern 10163, 10264 Stevison 11982 Strato 10009, 10037, 10264

10060, 10092, 10009, 10037, 10335, 10371, 10433, 11537

10748, 10009, 10037, 10264, 10698, 10805, 10817, 11115

10017, 10154, 11100, 10000, 10150, 10053, 10011, 10036, 10037, 10074, 10353, 10650, 11505, 11651, 11751, 11904

10156, 10051, 10060, 10178, 10092, 10036, 10226

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10374, 11037

10009, 10218 10236, 10180, 10009, 10037,

10163, 10264

Strong 11149, 11163 Studio Experience 10843 Stylandia 10217

Sunkai

Sunstar 10009, 10037, 10264, 10371 Sunwatt 10455 Sunwood 10037 Superla 10217 Superscan 10093, 10864, 11944 Supersonic 10009, 10208, 10455, 10805 SuperTech 10009, 10037, 10218, 10556 Supra 10178, 10009, 10374 Supreme 10000 Susumu 10218, 10287, 10335 Sutron 10009 SV2000 10054

SVA

Svasa 10455 Swisstec 10880, 11504 Sydney 10217

Sylvania

Symphonic

Synco

Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331 Sysline 10037 T+A 10447

Tacico 10178, 10092, 10009 Tai Yi 10009 Taishan 10009, 10374, 10817 Tandberg 10109, 10361, 10367 Tandy 10093, 10163, 10217, 10218 Targa 11371

Tashiko

Tatung

TCL 10706, 10698, 11027, 11537 TCM 10714, 10808

Teac

Tec

Tech Line 10037, 10668, 11163 Techica 10218 Technica 11982

10218, 10455, 10487, 10610, 10865

10748, 10587, 10865, 10870, 10871, 10872

10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10051, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10092, 10036, 10037, 10876, 11271, 11904, 11944 10000, 10180, 10178, 10171, 11904, 11944 10000, 10451, 10093, 10060, 10178, 10092, 10036

10092, 10036, 10163, 10170, 10217, 10650 10054, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10051, 10060, 10037, 10036, 10011, 10009, 10217, 11156, 11191, 11248, 11254, 11371, 11556, 11756

10154, 10178, 10171, 10706, 11755, 11149, 11037, 10714, 10712, 10698, 10668, 10512, 10455, 10418, 10264, 10217, 10170, 10037, 10009 10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10335

Technics

TechniSat 10556, 11267 Technisson 10714 Technosonic 10499, 10556 Technovox 10030, 10217 Techview 10847 Techwood 10250, 10051, 10060, 11163 Tecnimagen 10556

Teco

Tedelex

Teiron 10009 Tek 10820

Teknika

Tele System Electronic

Teleavia 10287, 10343 Telecolor 10017

Telecor

Telefunken

Telefusion 10037 Telegazi 10037, 10163, 10218, 10264 Telemeister 10037 Telesonic 10037 Telestar 10009, 10037, 10556 Teletech 10009, 10037, 10668, 11037 Teleton 10036, 10217 Televideon 10163 Teleview 10037 Tempest 10009, 10264, 10455 Tennessee 10037

Tensai

Tenson 10009 Tera 10030, 10092

Tevion

Texet 10009, 10217, 10218, 10374 Texla 10780 ThemeScene 10887 Thomas 10047, 10178, 10001, 11904

Thomson

Thorn

Thorn-Ferguson 10073, 10335, 10343, 10499

10054, 10250, 10051, 10226, 10556, 10650

10051, 10093, 10178, 10092, 10009, 10036, 10218, 10264, 10653, 11040 10009, 10208, 10217, 10418, 10606, 10698, 11537

10054, 10463, 10180, 10150, 10060, 10178, 10092

10876

10037, 10163, 10217, 10218, 10394 10702, 11504, 10821, 10820, 10819, 10714, 10712, 10698, 10625, 10587, 10560, 10498, 10486, 10346, 10343, 10335, 10287, 10109, 10074, 10073, 10037

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10371, 10374, 10715, 11037

10037, 10556, 10648, 10668, 10714, 10808, 11037, 11137, 11248, 11298, 11498, 11556

11447, 10047, 10037, 10109, 10287, 10335, 10343, 10560, 10625 10035, 10036, 10037, 10073, 10074, 10109, 10163, 10264, 10335, 10343, 10361, 10499, 10512

Tiane 10093, 10817 Tiny 11269 TMK 10236, 10180, 10178 TML 11756 TNCi 10017 Tobishi 10218 Tobo 10748, 10009, 10264 Tocom 10156

Tokai

Tokaido 11037 Tokyo 10035 Tomashi 10218 Tongguang 10264 Tongtel 10587, 10780 Topline 10668, 11037

Toshiba

Totevision 10051 Towada 10217 Toyoda 10009, 10264, 10371 Toyomenka 10178 Trakton 10217, 10264 Trans Continens 10037, 10217, 10668, 11037 TRANS-continents 10556, 10865

Transonic

Triad 10218, 10556 Trident 10217 Trio 11498 Tristar 10218, 10264 Triumph 10037, 10346, 10556 Truetone 10250, 10051 Tuntex 10030, 10092, 10009 TVS 10463 TVTEXT 95 10556

Uher

Ultra 10092 Ultravox 10037, 10163, 10374 Unic Line 10037, 10455

United

Universal 10047, 10037

Universum

10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10374, 10668, 11037

10154, 11256, 10156, 10150, 11265, 10060, 11145, 10145, 10166, 11037, 11156, 11163, 11164, 11356, 11508, 11556, 11656, 11704, 11945, 11971, 10845, 10821, 10718, 10650, 10618, 10508, 10264, 10217, 10195, 10109, 10070, 10036, 10035, 10011, 10009

10009, 10037, 10264, 10418, 10455, 10512, 10587, 10698, 10712, 10780

10037, 10370, 10374, 10418, 10480, 10486

10037, 10587, 10714, 10715, 11037, 11982

11163, 11037, 10668, 10631, 10618, 10512, 10480, 10418, 10370, 10362, 10361, 10346, 10327, 10264, 10217, 10200, 10195, 10170, 10109, 10074, 10070, 10037, 10036, 10011, 10009

Univox 10037, 10163 V 10864, 10885, 11755, 11756

V2max 10865 V7 Videoseven 10880, 11217, 11755 Vector Research 10030

Vestel

Vexa 10009, 10037

Victor

Videocon 10508 Videologic 10218 Videologique 10217, 10218 Videomac 10009 VideoSystem 10037 Videotechnic 10217, 10374 Videoton 10163 Vidikron 10054 Vidtech 10178, 10036 Viewpia 10876

Viewsonic

Viking 10060 Viore 11207 Vision 10037, 10217, 10264

Vizio

Vortec 10037 Voxson 10178, 10037, 10163, 10418

Waltham

Wards

Warumaia 10374, 10661

Watson

Watt Radio 10163 Waycon 10156 Wega 10036, 10037 Wegavox 10009 Weipai 10009 Welltech 10714 Weltblick 10217 Welton 10178 Weltstar 11037

Westinghouse

Wharfedale 10037, 10556, 10860, 11556 White

Westinghouse Windsor 10668, 11037

Windy Sam 10556 Wintel 10714 World 10451, 10236, 10463, 10180

10037, 10217, 10668, 11037, 11163

10250, 10053, 10036, 10650, 10653

10857, 10864, 10885, 11330, 11578, 11627, 11755

10864, 10885, 11755, 11756, 11758

10037, 10109, 10217, 10418, 10443, 10668, 11037 10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10051, 10093, 10236, 10180, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10166, 11347, 11156, 11147, 10866, 10195, 10001, 10037, 10035

10009, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10394, 10668, 10714, 11037

10000, 10451, 10885, 10889, 11282, 11577

10451, 10236, 10463, 10037, 10623, 10889, 11909

World-of-Vision

Worldview 10455 X-View 11191

Xenius 10634, 10661

Xiahua

Xianghai 10009 Xiangyang 10264 Xiangyu 10009 Xihu 10264, 10817 Xingfu 10009 Xinghai 10264 XLogic 10698, 10860 Xoceco 11064 Xoro 11196, 11217 XR-1000 10154, 10180, 10171 Xrypton 10037 Yamaha 10030, 10650, 11576

Yamishi 10037, 10217, 10218, 10455 Yapshe 10250 Yingge 10009 Yokan 10037

Yoko

Yonggu 10009 Yorx 10030, 10218 Youlanasi 10817 Yousida 10009 Yuhang 10009 Zanussi 10163, 10217, 10264

Zenith

ZhuHai 10009, 10374

10865, 10877, 10880, 11217, 11298

10009, 10264, 10698, 10773, 10817

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10370

10047, 10017, 10000, 10093, 10463, 11265, 10812, 10178, 10030, 11145, 10145, 10171, 10092, 10037, 11904, 11909, 11911

TV/DVD Combination b2, b4

Advent 11933

Akai 11675 Akura 11982 Alba 11037 Amstrad 11982 Apex Digital 11943 Audiovox 11937, 11951, 11952 Axion 11937, 11958 Black Diamond 11037

Bush 10698, 11037, 11900 Centrum 11037

Crown 11037 D-Vision 11982

Denver 10587

PRESET CODE



Elfunk 11037

Ferguson 11037

Finlux 11556 Goodmans 10587, 11037, 11900

Hitachi 11960

JDV 11982

Jensen 11933 KLH 11962

Lenco 10587

Logik 11037 Luker 11982 Luxor 11037 Matsui 11037

Maxim 11982 Medion 11900 Mirror 11900 Naiko 11982

Narita 11982 Panasonic 11941

Philips 11454, 10556, 11961 Powerpoint 10698 Prima 11933 RCA 11948, 11958

Roadstar 11900 Saivod 11982

Samsung 11903 Schneider 11982 SEG 11037 Sova 11952 Stevison 11982 Sylvania 10171 Teac 10698

Technica 11982 Telefunken 10698 Thomson 10625 Transonic 10587 United 10587, 11037, 11982

Vestel 11037

Akai 30695

Akura 31367 Alba 30695, 30884 Amstrad 31367 Apex Digital 30830 Black Diamond 30713, 30884

Broksonic 30695 Bush 30713, 30884 Centrum 30713

Citizen 30695 Crown 30713 D-Vision 31367

PRESET CODE

0

DMTech 31271 Elfunk 30713, 30884

Emerson 30675, 31268 ESA 31268 Ferguson 30695, 30713, 30884

Funai 31268 Goodmans 30713

Grandin 30713 Grundig 30539, 30695 Hitachi 31247

Insignia 31268

JDV 31367

JNC 31271 Konka 31192

Logik 30713, 30884

Luker 31367 Luxor 30713 Magnavox 31268

Matsui 30713, 30884 Maxim 31367 Naiko 31367

Narita 31367 Neovia 31271 Orion 30695

Paciﬁc 30695

Panasonic 31490 Philips 30539, 30854, 31260 RCA 31022

Saivod 31367

Samsung 30899 Sansui 30695 Schneider 31367 SEG 30713, 30884 Sliding 31115 Stevison 31367 Sylvania 30630, 30675, 31268 Technica 31367

Thomson 30551 Toshiba 30695 United 30713, 30884, 31367

Universum 30713 Vestel 30884

TV/VCR Combination b2, b3, b4

Aiwa 11904, 11911

America Action 10180 Amstrad 10171 Audiovox 10180 Beko 10486

Black Diamond 11909

Broksonic 10463, 11911 Bush 11556 Curtis Mathes 10051

Daewoo 11909

Emerson 10236, 10463, 11909, 11911

Ferguson 10073, 10625

Fidelity 10171 Funai 11904

GoldStar 10037 Goodmans 10374, 11909 Grundig 10037, 10195, 10556 Harley Davidson 11904

Hinari 10036 Hitachi 11904 Internal 11909

JVC 11923

LG 10178

Lloyd’s 11904 Magnavox 10054, 11904

Memorex 10250 Mitsubishi 10093, 10556, 11917 Orion 10463, 11911

Palsonic 11904

Panasonic 10250, 10051 Penney 10051 Philips 10037, 10556 Quasar 10250, 10051

Radiola 10556

RadioShack 11904

RCA

Saba 10625

Samsung 11959 Sansui 10463, 11904, 11911 Schneider 10037, 10556, 11904 Sears 11904 Sharp 10093, 11917 Siemens 10037 Sony 10000, 11505, 11904 Sylvania 10054 Symphonic 11904 Teac 10178, 10171

Technics 10556 Thomas 11904 Thomson 10625 Toshiba 11971

White

Westinghouse Zenith 11904, 11909, 11911

Aiwa

10047, 10051, 10093, 11917, 11922

11909

20000, 20352, 20479, 20742, 21137

Akai 20352 Alba 20352 America Action 20278 Amstrad 20000 Audiovox 20278 Beko 20104

Bestar 20278 Blue Sky 20278, 20352, 20742 BPL 20046 Broksonic 20002, 20479, 21479 Bush 20352, 20742 Citizen 20278, 21278

Curtis Mathes 20035, 21035 Daewoo 20278, 20637, 21278

Dantax 20352

Emerson

Ferguson 20000, 20278

Fidelity 20000 Firstline 20278 Funai 20000

GoldStar 20037, 20480, 21237 Goodmans 20278, 20352, 20637 Grandin 20278, 20742 Grundig 20081, 20347, 20352, 20742 Hanimex 20352

Harley Davidson 20000 Hinari 20352 Hitachi 20000 Hypson 20037 Internal 20278, 20637

JBL 20278

JMB 20352 Kambrook 20037

Kneissel 20278, 20352 LG 20037, 20480, 21237

Lloyd’s 20000 Loewe 20037 Magnasonic 20278, 21278

Magnavox 20081, 20000, 21781 Magnin 20240 Matsui 20352, 20742 Medion 20352

Memorex

MGA 20240 Mitsubishi 20048, 20081, 20043, 20807 Optimus 20162, 21162, 21262

Orion

Pace 20352

Paciﬁc 20742

20002, 20278, 20479, 20637, 21278, 21479

20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, 20807, 21035, 21060

20162, 20037, 21162, 21237, 21262

20002, 20352, 20479, 20742, 21479

Palsonic 20000

Panasonic

Penney

Philips 20081 Portland 20637 Quasar 20035, 20162, 21035, 21162

Radiola 20081

RadioShack 20000

RCA

Saba 20320

Samsung 20240, 20432, 21014 Sansui 20000, 20479, 21479 Sanyo 20240 Saville 20352 Schneider 20081, 20000 Sears 20037, 20000, 21237 SEG 20637 Sharp 20037, 20048, 20807 Shivaki 20037 Siemens 20081 Sinudyne 20352 Sony 20032, 20000, 21232 Supra 20348 Sylvania 20081, 21781 Symphonic 20000 Tatung 20352

Teac 20037, 20000, 20637, 20642 Technics 20081 Technosonic 20352 Telefunken 20278 Thomas 20000 Thomson 20278 Toshiba 20352, 20432, 20845, 21145 United 20742

White

Westinghouse Zenith 20000, 20479, 20637, 21479

20035, 20162, 21035, 21162, 21262 20035, 20037, 20240, 21035, 21237

20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, 20807, 21035, 21060

20278, 20637

Thomson 30551

TV/VCR/DVD Combination b2, b3, b4

Akai 11903

Broksonic 11938

Emerson 11944

ESA 11944 Magnavox 11944

Panasonic 11946, 11947

RCA 11953

Sharp 11917

Sylvania 11944 Symphonic 11944 Toshiba 11945

Sharp 20807

Akai 30899

Emerson 30821

ESA 30821 Magnavox 30821

Panasonic 31362, 31462

RCA 31132

Sharp 30630

Superscan 30821 Sylvania 30821 Symphonic 30821 Toshiba 31045

VCR

A-Mark

ABS 21972

Admiral

Adventura 20037, 20240, 20000 Aiko 20278 Aim 20278, 20348, 20642

Aiwa

Akai

Akura 20041

Alba

Alienware 21972 Allegro 20039, 21137 Allorgan 20240 Allstar 20081 America Action 20278 American High 20035, 20081 Amoisonic 20479 Amstrad 20000, 20278

Anam

Anam National 20162, 20226, 21162, 21562 Ansonic 20000 Aristona 20081 ASA 20037, 20081 Asha 20240 Astra 20035, 20240 Asuka 20037, 20081, 20000, 20038

20037, 20240, 20000, 20278, 20046

20060, 20048, 20039, 20047, 20104, 20121, 20209, 20479

20037, 20032, 20000, 20209, 20041, 20348, 20352, 20479, 20742, 21137 20037, 20240, 20041, 20106, 20315, 20348, 20352, 20642

20081, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348, 20352

20162, 20037, 20240, 20278, 20226, 20480

Audiolab 20081 Audiosonic 20278 Audiovox 20037, 20278, 20038 Avis 20000 AVP 20000, 20352 Awa 20037, 20043, 20278, 20642

Baird

Basic Line 20104, 20278, 20046 Beaumark 20240 Beko 20104

Bell & Howell

Bestar 20278 Black Diamond 20642 Black Panther 20278 Blaupunkt 20162, 20081, 20226

Blue Sky

BPL 20046 Brandt 20041, 20320 Brandt Electronique 20041 Brinkmann 20209, 20348

Broksonic

Bush

Calix 20037

Candle 20037, 20038 Canon 20035 Capehart 20002 Carena 20081, 20209 Carrefour 20045 Carrera 20240 Carver 20035, 20081 Casio 20000 Cathay 20278 CCE 20278 CGE 20000, 20041 Changhong 20048, 20081 Cimline 20209 Cineral 20278 CineVision 21137

Citizen

Classic 20037 Clatronic 20000, 21593 Colortyme 20060, 20035, 20045, 20278 Colt 20000 Combitech 20352 Condor 20278 Craig 20037, 20047, 20240 Criterion 20000

20000, 20104, 20041, 20278, 20046, 20106

20035, 20048, 20039, 20000, 20104, 20046, 20479

20037, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20352, 20480, 20642, 20742, 21137

20184, 20121, 20209, 20002, 20348, 20479, 21479 20081, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348, 20352, 20642, 20742

20035, 20037, 20240, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20479, 21278

Crosley 20035, 20081, 20000 Crown 20037, 20278, 20480

Curtis Mathes

Cybernex 20240 CyberPower 21972 Cyrus 20081

Daewoo

Dansai 20278 Dantax 20352 Daytron 20037, 20278

De Graaf

Decca

Degraff 20048, 20081, 20042, 20104 Deitron 20278 Dell 21972 Denon 20081, 20042 Derwent 20041 Diamant 20037 Diamond 20348 Digitor 20642 DirecTV 20739 Domland 20209 DSE 20642

Dual

Dumont 20081, 20000, 20104 Durabrand 20039, 20038, 20642 Dynatech 20240, 20000 Elbe 20278, 20038

Electrohome

Electrophonic 20037 Elin 20240 Elta 20278 Emerald 20184, 20121 Emerex 20032

Emerson

ESA 21137 ESC 20240, 20278 EuroLine 21593

Ferguson

Fidelity 20240, 20000, 20352, 20432

Finlandia

Finlux 20081, 20000, 20042, 20104

20060, 20035, 20162, 20240, 20000, 20041, 20278, 20432, 21035

20037, 20045, 20104, 20209, 20278, 20046, 20352, 20637, 20642, 21137, 21278

20048, 20081, 20042, 20104, 20046 20081, 20000, 20067, 20209, 20041, 20352

20081, 20000, 20041, 20278, 20348

20060, 20037, 20240, 20000, 20043, 20209

20035, 20037, 20184, 20039, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20121, 20043, 20209, 20002, 20278, 20348, 20479, 20637, 21278, 21479, 21593

20000, 20041, 20278, 20320, 20348

20037, 20048, 20081, 20000, 20042, 20104, 20043, 20046, 20106, 20226

Firstline

Fisher

Flint 20209, 20348 Fuji 20035, 20033 Fujitsu 20037, 20045, 20000 Fujitsu General 20037 Funai 20037, 20000, 20278, 21593 Galaxi 20000

Galaxis 20278 Garrard 20000 Gateway 21972

GEC 20081 Gemini 20060 General 20045 General Technic 20348 Genexxa 20037, 20000, 20104, 20278 Go Video 20240, 20432, 20614, 21137

GoldStar

Goodmans

GPX 20037 Gradiente 20000 Graetz 20240, 20104, 20041

Granada

Grandin

Grundig

Haaz 20348

Hanimex 20352 Hanseatic 20037, 20081, 20209, 20038 Haojie 20240 Harley Davidson 20000 Harman/Kardon 20081, 20038 Headquarter 20046 Hewlett Packard 21972 HI-Q 20035, 20047, 20000

Hinari

Hisawa 20209, 2035 Hischito 20045

Hitachi

Hoeher 20278, 20642 Hornyphon 20081 Howard Computers 21972 HP 21972

20037, 20045, 20042, 20043, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20480, 21137 20039, 20047, 20000, 20104, 20046

20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, 20000, 20226, 20320, 20807, 21035, 21060

20035, 20037, 20039, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20038, 20225, 20226, 20480, 21137, 21237 20037, 20081, 20240, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20352, 20637, 20642, 20742

20035, 20037, 20048, 20081, 20240, 20000, 20042, 20104, 20046, 20226 20037, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20742 20081, 20226, 20320, 20347, 20348, 20352, 20742

20240, 20209, 20041, 20278, 20352

20035, 20037, 20081, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20042, 20041, 20046, 20089

Hughes Network Systems

Humax 20739 Hush 21972

Hypson

Hytek 20047, 20000 iBUYPOWER 21972

Imperial 20000 Ingersol 20240, 20209 Interbuy 20037 Interfunk 20081, 20104 Internal 20278, 20637 International 20037, 20278, 20642

Intervision

Irradio 20037, 20081, 21137

ITT

ITT Nokia 20240, 20104, 20041, 20106 ITV 20037, 20278 Janeil 20240

JBL 20278 Jensen 20067, 20041 JMB 20209, 20348, 20352, 20742 Joyce 20000

JVC

Kambrook 20037

Karcher 20081, 20278, 20642 KEC 20037, 20278

Kendo

Kenwood 20067, 20041, 20038, 20046 KIC 20000 Kimari 20047

Kneissel

Kodak 20035, 20037 Kolin 20043, 20041 Kolster 20209 KTV 20000 Kuba 20047 Kuba Electronic 20047 Lenco 20278

Lifetec 20209, 20348 Linksys 21972 Lloyd’s 20240, 20000, 20038

Loewe

Logik 20240, 20000, 20209, 20106 Lumatron 20278, 21137 Lunatron 21137

20042, 20739

20037, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20352, 20480

20037, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20348

20240, 20104, 20041, 20046, 20106

20184, 20081, 20045, 20067, 20041, 21162

20037, 20209, 20278, 20106, 20315, 20348, 20642

20037, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20352

20037, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20042, 20209, 20278, 20038, 20225, 20480, 21137, 21237

21062, 20162, 20037, 20081, 21262, 21562

PRESET CODE



Luxor

LXI 20037, 20000, 20042, 20067 M Electronic 20037, 20240, 20000, 20038

Magnadyne 20081

Magnasonic

Magnavox

Magnin 20240 Magnum 20642 Manesth 20081, 20045, 20209 Marantz 20035, 20081, 20209, 20038 Mark 20000, 20278 Marta 20037 Mastec 20642 Master’s 20278

Matsui

Matsushita

Media Center PC 21972 Mediator 20081 Medion 20209, 20348, 20352, 20642 MEI 20035

Memorex

Metronic 20081

Metz

MGA 20060, 20240, 20043 MGN Technology 20240 Micormay 20348 Micromaxx 20209 Microsoft 21972 Midland 20240 Migros 20000 Mind 21972 Minolta 20042

Mitsubishi

Motorola 20035, 20048 MTC 20240, 20000 MTX 20000 Multitec 20037 Multitech 20039, 20000 Murphy 20000 Myryad 20081 NAD 20240, 20104

Naiko 20348, 20642 NAP 20039 National 20226

20048, 20047, 20104, 20043, 20046, 20106, 20315

20037, 20240, 20000, 20278, 21278 20035, 20037, 20048, 20039, 20081, 20240, 20000, 20226, 20618, 20642, 21593, 21781

20037, 20240, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20352, 20742 20035, 20162, 20081, 20226, 21162

20035, 20162, 20037, 20048, 20039, 20047, 20240, 20000, 20104, 20209, 20278, 20046, 20348, 20479, 21162, 21237, 21262

21062, 20162, 20037, 20081, 20226, 20347, 20836, 21162, 21262, 21562

20060, 20048, 20047, 20081, 20000, 20042, 20067, 20043, 20041, 20480, 20642, 20807

Nebula Electronics 20033

NEC

Neckermann 20081, 20041 Nesco 20000 Neufunk 20209 Newave 20037 Nikkai 20278 Nikko 20037, 20278 Nikkodo 20037, 20278 Nishi 20240 Niveus Media 21972 Noblex 20240

Nokia

Nordmende 20067, 20041, 20320 Northgate 21972 Nu-Tec 20209

Oceanic

Okano 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348 Olympus 20035, 20162, 20104, 20226 Onimax 20642 Onkyo 20222

Optimus

Orion

Orson 20000 Osaki 20037, 20000 Otake 20209 Otto Versand 20081 Pace 20352

Paciﬁc 20000, 20348, 20642, 20742 Packard Bell 21972 Palladium 20037, 20209, 20041, 20348 Palsonic 20000, 20642 Panama 20035

Panasonic

Pathe Cinema 20043 Pathe Marconi 20041

Penney

Pentax 20042 Perdio 20000, 20209

Philco

20035, 20037, 20048, 20104, 20067, 20041, 20278, 20038, 21137

20048, 20081, 20240, 20042, 20104, 20041, 20278, 20046, 20106, 20315

20048, 20081, 20000, 20104, 20041, 20046, 20106

21062, 20035, 20162, 20037, 20048, 20047, 20240, 20000, 20104, 20432, 21162, 21262 20184, 20240, 20000, 20104, 20121, 20209, 20002, 20278, 20348, 20352, 20479, 20742, 21479

21062, 20035, 20162, 20000, 20225, 20226, 20614, 20616, 20836, 21035, 21162, 21262, 21562

20035, 20162, 20037, 20047, 20081, 20240, 20000, 20042, 20067, 20038, 21035, 21237

20035, 20081, 20000, 20209, 20038, 20226, 20479

20035, 20162, 20048, 20081,

Philips

Phoenix 20278 Phonola 20081 Pilot 20037 Pioneer 20162, 20081, 20042, 20067 Polk Audio 20081 Portland 20278, 20637 Presidian 21593 Prinz 20000 Proﬁtronic 20081, 20240 Proline 20000, 20278, 20320, 20642 Proscan 20060, 21060 Prosco 20278 Prosonic 20209, 20278 Protec 20000 Protech 20081 ProVision 20278 Pulsar 20039, 20240, 20278 Pulser 20240 Pye 20081, 20000 Qisheng 20060

Quarter 20046 Quartz 20035, 20047, 20046

Quasar

Quelle 20081 Radialva 20037, 20048, 20081

Radiola 20081 Radionette 20037, 21137

RadioShack

Radix 20037 Randex 20037 Rank 20041 Rank Arena 20041

RCA

Realistic

Reoc 20348 ReplayTV 20614, 20616 Rex 20041 Ricavision 21972 Rio 21137

Roadstar

Runco 20039 Saba 20041, 20278, 20320

Saisho 20209, 20348 Salora 20104, 20043, 20046, 20106

20045, 20000, 20209, 20226, 20616, 20618, 20739, 21081, 21181

20035, 20162, 20002, 20278, 20226, 21035, 21162

20035, 20162, 20037, 20048, 20047, 20240, 20000, 20104, 20046, 21162

20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20042, 20106, 20226, 20320, 20807, 20880, 21035, 21060 20035, 20162, 20037, 20048, 20047, 20240, 20000, 20104, 20121, 20278, 20046, 21162

20037, 20081, 20240, 20278, 20038, 20742

Sampo 20037, 20048

Samsung

Samtron 20240 Sanky 20048, 20039 Sansei 20048

Sansui

Sanyo

Saville 20240, 20278, 20352 SBR 20081 ScanSonic 20240

Schaub Lorenz

Schneider

Scott 20184, 20045, 20121, 20043

Sears

Seaway 20278

SEG

SEI 20081 Sei-Sinudyne 20081 Seleco 20037, 20041 Semp 20045 Sentra 20278

Sharp

Shinco 20000 Shintom 20039, 20240, 20000, 20104 Shivaki 20037 Shogun 20240

Siemens

Siera 20081

Signature

Silva 20037 Silver 20278 SilverCrest 20642 Singer 20037, 20240, 20045, 20348 Sinudyne 20081, 20209, 20352 Smaragd 20348 Sonic Blue 20614, 20616, 21137 Sonographe 20046 Sonolor 20048, 20046 Sontec 20037, 20278 Sonwa 20642

Sony

20060, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20038, 20432, 20739, 21014

20240, 20000, 20067, 20209, 20041, 20002, 20106, 20348, 20479, 21479 20048, 20047, 20240, 20000, 20104, 20067, 20209, 20046, 20348, 20479, 21137

20000, 20104, 20041, 20106, 20315, 20348 20037, 20081, 20240, 20000, 20042, 20278, 20348, 20352, 20642, 21137

20060, 20035, 20162, 20037, 20048, 20039, 20047, 20033, 20045, 20000, 20042, 20104, 20067, 20043, 20209, 20041, 21237, 20046

20081, 20240, 20278, 20637, 20642

20037, 20048, 20047, 20032, 20000, 20209, 20807

20037, 20081, 20104, 20046, 20320, 20347

20060, 20035, 20037, 20048, 20000, 20046, 20479

20035, 20048, 20047, 20032, 20033, 20000, 20067, 20046, 20106, 20226, 20636, 21232, 21972

Soundmaster 20000 Soundwave 20037, 20209, 20348 Stack 9 21972 Standard 20278 Stern 20278 STS 20042 Sunkai 20209, 20278, 20348 Sunstar 20000 Suntronic 20000 Supra 20037, 20278, 20348 Susumu 20037 SV2000 20000 SVA 20000

Sylvania

Symphonic 20240, 20000, 20002, 21593 Systemax 21972 T+A 20162

Tagar Systems 21972 Taisho 20209 Tandberg 20278 Tandy 20000, 20104

Tashiko

Tatung

Tchibo 20348 TCM 20348

Teac

Technics

TechniSat 20348 Technosonic 20352

Teco

Tedelex 20037, 20209, 20348, 20642 Teknika 20035, 20037, 20000 Teleavia 20041 Telecorder 20240

Telefunken

Telerent 20226 Telestar 20037 Teletech 20000, 20278 Tensai 20037, 20000, 20278 Tevion 20209, 20348, 20479, 20642 Texet 20278 Thomas 20000, 20002

Thomson

Thorn 20037, 20104, 20041, 20320 Tisonic 20278 Tivo 20618, 20636, 20739, 21996 TMK 20240, 20000

20035, 20081, 20000, 20043, 21593, 21781

20037, 20048, 20081, 20240, 20000 20048, 20081, 20045, 20000, 20067, 20043, 20209, 20041, 20348, 20352

20037, 20000, 20067, 20041, 20278, 20637, 20642, 21593 20035, 20162, 20037, 20081, 20000, 20226, 21162

20035, 20037, 20048, 20041, 20038

20209, 20041, 20278, 20320, 20642

20060, 20067, 20041, 20278, 20320

PRESET CODE



DENON AVR-3808 User Guide

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual